Intel Server SRPL8 User Manual

SRPL8  
Server System  
Product Guide  
Order Number: A49445-001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Part I: User’s Guide......................................................................................................... 11  
1 Chassis Description  
Chassis Feature Summary................................................................................................. 14  
Chassis Front Controls and Indicators....................................................................... 15  
Chassis Back Controls and Features......................................................................... 17  
Peripherals......................................................................................................................... 18  
3.5-inch Diskette Drive............................................................................................... 18  
3.5-inch Hard Drive Bays........................................................................................... 18  
5.25-inch Removable Media Device Bay ................................................................... 18  
Hot-Swap Power Supplies.................................................................................................. 19  
System Cooling .................................................................................................................. 19  
2 Boardset Description  
Boardset Features.............................................................................................................. 22  
Processor Overview................................................................................................... 24  
Memory Overview...................................................................................................... 25  
DIMM Installation Sequence...................................................................................... 26  
Peripherals......................................................................................................................... 27  
Super I/O Chip........................................................................................................... 27  
Add-In Board Slots ............................................................................................................. 27  
Video.................................................................................................................................. 27  
SCSI Controller .................................................................................................................. 28  
IDE Controller..................................................................................................................... 28  
Keyboard and Mouse ......................................................................................................... 28  
Server Management........................................................................................................... 29  
Front Panel Controller (FPC) ..................................................................................... 30  
Hot-swap Controller (HSC) ........................................................................................ 30  
System Security ................................................................................................................. 31  
Password Protection.................................................................................................. 31  
Secure Boot Mode..................................................................................................... 31  
Boot Sequence Control.............................................................................................. 31  
Boot Without Keyboard.............................................................................................. 32  
Locked Power and Reset Switches............................................................................ 32  
Diskette Write Protect................................................................................................ 32  
Video Blanking........................................................................................................... 32  
Emergency Management Port (EMP) ........................................................................ 32  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Configuration Software and Utilities  
Hot Keys............................................................................................................................. 34  
Power-on Self Test (POST)................................................................................................ 34  
Using BIOS Setup .............................................................................................................. 35  
Record Your Setup Settings ...................................................................................... 35  
If You Cannot Access Setup...................................................................................... 35  
Starting Setup............................................................................................................ 36  
Setup Menus ............................................................................................................. 36  
Main Menu................................................................................................................. 38  
Advanced Menu......................................................................................................... 41  
Security Menu............................................................................................................ 45  
Server Menu.............................................................................................................. 46  
Boot Menu ................................................................................................................. 49  
Exit Menu................................................................................................................... 50  
Using the System Setup Utility (SSU)................................................................................. 51  
When to Run the SSU ............................................................................................... 51  
What You Need to Do................................................................................................ 52  
Running the SSU....................................................................................................... 52  
Customizing the SSU................................................................................................. 55  
Launching a Task ...................................................................................................... 56  
Resource Configuration Add-In (RCA) Window ......................................................... 56  
Multiboot Options Add-In ........................................................................................... 57  
Security Add-In.......................................................................................................... 57  
System Event Log (SEL) Viewer Add-In .................................................................... 58  
Sensor Data Record (SDR) Manager Add-In............................................................. 60  
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Manager Add-In.......................................................... 61  
Exiting the SSU.......................................................................................................... 63  
Direct Platform Control (DPC) Console .............................................................................. 63  
How the DPC Console Works.................................................................................... 63  
DPC Console Requirements...................................................................................... 65  
Setting Up the Server for the EMP............................................................................. 66  
Main DPC Console Window....................................................................................... 67  
Server Control Operations ......................................................................................... 68  
Phonebook ................................................................................................................ 71  
Management Plug-Ins................................................................................................ 72  
FRU and SDR Load Utility.................................................................................................. 72  
When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility...................................................................... 73  
What You Need to Do................................................................................................ 73  
How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility..................................................................... 73  
Cleaning Up and Exiting ............................................................................................ 76  
Upgrading BIOS ................................................................................................................. 77  
Preparing for the Upgrade ......................................................................................... 77  
Upgrading BIOS......................................................................................................... 78  
Recovering BIOS....................................................................................................... 79  
Changing BIOS Language......................................................................................... 79  
Using the Firmware Update Utility ...................................................................................... 80  
Running the Firmware Update Utility ......................................................................... 80  
iv  
Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Video Drivers....................................................................................................... 80  
Using the QLogic SCSI Utility............................................................................................. 80  
Running the SCSI Utility ............................................................................................ 80  
4 Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
Tools and Supplies Needed................................................................................................ 81  
Equipment Log .......................................................................................................... 81  
Hot-Swapping Fans............................................................................................................ 82  
Hot-Swapping a SCSI Hard Drive....................................................................................... 84  
Hot-Swapping Bays ................................................................................................... 84  
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives ...................................................................................... 84  
Hot-Swapping Power Supplies ........................................................................................... 88  
Hot-Swapping a Power Supply .................................................................................. 88  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide ........................................................................... 91  
5 Working Inside the System  
Tools and Supplies Needed................................................................................................ 93  
Safety: Before You Remove Server Covers ...................................................................... 93  
Warnings and Cautions ...................................................................................................... 94  
Removing and Installing the Front Bezels .......................................................................... 95  
Removing and Installing Server Covers.............................................................................. 96  
Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ..................................................................... 97  
Installing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ....................................................................... 97  
Removing the Top Cover........................................................................................... 98  
Installing the Top Cover............................................................................................. 99  
Removing the Memory Module Cover...................................................................... 100  
Installing the Memory Module Cover........................................................................ 100  
Fan Array Housing ........................................................................................................... 101  
Removing the Fan Array Housing............................................................................ 101  
Installing the Fan Array Housing.............................................................................. 101  
LCD Module ..................................................................................................................... 102  
Removing the LCD Module...................................................................................... 102  
Installing the LCD Module........................................................................................ 103  
Profusion Carrier Tray...................................................................................................... 104  
Removing the Profusion Carrier Tray....................................................................... 104  
Installing the Profusion Carrier Tray......................................................................... 104  
Front Panel Controller Board............................................................................................ 106  
Removing the Front Panel Controller Board ............................................................ 106  
Installing the Front Panel Controller Board .............................................................. 106  
Add-In Boards .................................................................................................................. 108  
Installing/Replacing an Add-In Board....................................................................... 108  
Removing an Add-In Board...................................................................................... 111  
I/O Riser Board ................................................................................................................ 111  
Removing the I/O Riser Board................................................................................. 111  
Installing the I/O Riser Board................................................................................... 112  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PHP LED Board ............................................................................................................... 113  
Removing a PHP LED Board................................................................................... 113  
Installing a PHP LED Board..................................................................................... 114  
I/O Tray............................................................................................................................ 114  
Removing the I/O Tray............................................................................................. 114  
Installing the I/O Tray............................................................................................... 115  
Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board................................................................... 116  
Removing the ICMB Board ...................................................................................... 116  
Installing the ICMB Board ........................................................................................ 116  
AC Filter and Cable.......................................................................................................... 117  
Removing the AC Filter and Cable........................................................................... 117  
Installing the AC Filter and Cable............................................................................. 117  
Peripheral Bay.................................................................................................................. 117  
Removing the Peripheral Bay .................................................................................. 117  
Installing the Peripheral Bay .................................................................................... 118  
Peripheral Bay Backplane ................................................................................................ 119  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Backplane................................................................. 119  
Installing the Peripheral Bay Backplane................................................................... 120  
Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board...................................................................................... 121  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board ...................................................... 121  
Installing the Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board ........................................................ 123  
Diskette Drive................................................................................................................... 124  
Removing the Diskette Drive ................................................................................... 124  
Installing the Diskette Drive ..................................................................................... 125  
Peripheral Drives.............................................................................................................. 126  
Installing a 5.25-inch Peripheral in the Front Bay..................................................... 126  
Removing a 5.25-inch Peripheral from the Front Bay .............................................. 128  
6 Upgrading Boardset Components  
Tools and Supplies Needed.............................................................................................. 129  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 130  
Cache Coherency Filters: Removing and Installing ......................................................... 132  
Removing the Cache Coherency Filters................................................................... 132  
Installing the Cache Coherency Filters..................................................................... 133  
Processor Retention Bracket: Removing and Installing ................................................... 134  
Removing the Processor Retention Bracket ............................................................ 134  
Installing the Processor Retention Bracket .............................................................. 135  
Mezzanine Board(s): Removing and Installing.................................................................. 135  
Removing the Mezzanine Board(s).......................................................................... 135  
Installing the Mezzanine Board(s)............................................................................ 135  
Profusion Carrier: Removing and Installing ..................................................................... 136  
Removing the Profusion Carrier............................................................................... 136  
Installing the Profusion Carrier................................................................................. 136  
PHP I/O Carrier: Removing and Installing ....................................................................... 137  
Removing the PHP I/O Carrier................................................................................. 138  
Installing the PHP I/O Carrier................................................................................... 138  
vi  
Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Midplane: Removing and Installing.................................................................................. 140  
Removing the Midplane ........................................................................................... 140  
Installing the Midplane............................................................................................. 140  
Memory Modules and DIMMs: Removing and Installing.................................................. 142  
Removing a Memory Module................................................................................... 142  
Installing a Memory Module..................................................................................... 142  
Removing DIMMs .................................................................................................... 144  
Installing DIMMs...................................................................................................... 145  
Processors: Removing and Installing............................................................................... 147  
Removing a Processor ............................................................................................ 148  
Installing a Processor .............................................................................................. 149  
Front Side Bus (FSB) Termination Board Assembly......................................................... 150  
Removing a Termination Board ............................................................................... 150  
Installing a Termination Board ................................................................................. 151  
Replacing the Backup Battery .......................................................................................... 152  
7 Solving Problems  
Resetting the System ....................................................................................................... 155  
Initial System Startup ....................................................................................................... 155  
Checklist.................................................................................................................. 155  
Running New Application Software................................................................................... 156  
Checklist.................................................................................................................. 156  
After the System Has Been Running Correctly................................................................. 156  
Checklist.................................................................................................................. 156  
More Problem-Solving Procedures................................................................................... 157  
Preparing the System for Diagnostic Testing........................................................... 157  
Using PCDiagnostics ............................................................................................... 157  
Monitoring POST ..................................................................................................... 158  
Verifying Proper Operation of Key System Lights.................................................... 158  
Confirming Loading of the Operating System .......................................................... 158  
Specific Problems and Corrective Actions........................................................................ 158  
Power Light Does Not Light ..................................................................................... 159  
No Beep Codes ....................................................................................................... 159  
No Characters Appear on Screen............................................................................ 159  
Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect ...................................................................... 160  
System Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly......................................................... 160  
Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light............................................................. 160  
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light .......................................................... 161  
CD-ROM Drive Activity Light Does Not Light ........................................................... 161  
Network Problems ................................................................................................... 161  
PCI Installation Tips................................................................................................. 161  
Problems with Application Software.................................................................................. 162  
Bootable CD-ROM Is Not Detected.................................................................................. 162  
Error and Informational Messages.................................................................................... 162  
POST Codes and Countdown Codes....................................................................... 163  
POST Error Codes and Messages ................................................................................... 167  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Technical Reference  
Connectors....................................................................................................................... 172  
Diskette Drive .......................................................................................................... 174  
IRMC Connector...................................................................................................... 175  
VGA Video Port ....................................................................................................... 176  
Keyboard and Mouse............................................................................................... 176  
Parallel Port............................................................................................................. 177  
Serial Ports A and B ................................................................................................ 177  
Universal Serial Bus (USB)...................................................................................... 178  
SCSI........................................................................................................................ 178  
IDE .......................................................................................................................... 179  
PCI .......................................................................................................................... 180  
Configuration Switches..................................................................................................... 182  
General Procedure to Change Switch Settings........................................................ 183  
CMOS Clear Switch................................................................................................. 183  
Password Clear Switch............................................................................................ 184  
Recovery Boot Switch.............................................................................................. 184  
System I/O Addresses...................................................................................................... 185  
Memory Map .................................................................................................................... 186  
PCI Configuration and Device Map .................................................................................. 187  
Interrupts.......................................................................................................................... 187  
Video Modes .................................................................................................................... 189  
A Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Power System .................................................................................................................. 191  
Power Supply Input Voltages................................................................................... 192  
Power Supply Output Voltages................................................................................ 192  
Server Current Usage ...................................................................................................... 193  
Calculating Power Usage ................................................................................................. 194  
B Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
Equipment Log ................................................................................................................. 197  
Configuration Worksheets........................................................................................ 199  
SSU Worksheets ..................................................................................................... 199  
C Regulatory Specifications  
Regulatory and Environmental Specifications................................................................... 207  
Environmental Specifications................................................................................... 207  
Declaration of the Manufacturer or Importer ............................................................ 207  
Safety Compliance................................................................................................... 207  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ...................................................................... 208  
viii  
Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Warnings  
WARNING: English (US)................................................................................................. 210  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français........................................................................................... 212  
WARNUNG: Deutsch ...................................................................................................... 214  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano................................................................................................... 216  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español.............................................................................................. 218  
Index.................................................................................................................................... 221  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part I: User’s Guide  
1 Chassis Description  
2 Boardset Description  
3 Configuration Software and Utilities  
4 Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
WARNING  
Only a QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN is authorized to remove  
the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server.  
Before removing the covers, see “Safety: Before You Remove Server  
Covers” on page 93 and “ Warnings and Cautions” on page 94.  
This manual is divided into two parts:  
User’s Guide, beginning on page 11—describes procedures that DO NOT REQUIRE internal  
server access. You do not need to be a qualified service technician to perform procedures  
listed in the User’s Guide.  
Service Technician’s Guide, beginning on page 91—describes procedures that REQUIRE  
internal server access. You must be a qualified service technician to perform procedures listed  
in the Service Technician’s Guide.  
NOTE  
The SRPL8 server system is an upgrade to the SRPM8 server system with  
PCI-X features added. The SRPL8 server system implements  
PCI 2.1-compliant buses with four PCI-X-enabled slots. In this document,  
the term “PCI” is loosely used to refer to PCI and PCI-X features. The term  
“PCI-X” is limited to references to PCI-X only.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Part 1: User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Chassis Description  
The SRPL8 rack server is easy to integrate and can easily accommodate the needs of a variety of  
high-performance applications—for example, network servers, multiuser systems, and large  
database operations. As your application requirements increase, you can upgrade your server with:  
More powerful and/or additional processors  
An additional processor mezzanine carrier with cache coherency filters  
An additional memory module and additional memory  
Other peripheral devices  
Add-in I/O boards  
Table 1.  
Server Physical Specifications  
Specification  
Height  
Value  
31.12 cm (12.25 inches, 7u)  
44.45 cm (17.5 inches)  
71.12 cm (28.0 inches)  
Width  
Depth  
Weight  
51.4 kg (113 lbs) minimum configuration  
60 kg (132 lbs) maximum configuration  
Required front clearance  
10 inches (inlet airflow <35 °C / 95 °F)  
8 inches (no airflow restriction)  
Required rear clearance  
OM08751  
Figure 1. SRPL8 MP Server  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chassis Feature Summary  
Table 2.  
Feature  
Chassis Feature Summary  
Comment  
Power system with redundancy  
The 750 watt, 220 VAC autoranging power supplies include integrated  
fans for cooling. When the server is configured with three supplies  
(2 + 1), the third provides redundancy. The supplies can be replaced—  
hot-swapped—without turning off server power. The server requires a  
minimum of two power supplies. LEDs on the back of the power supply  
indicate power on, failure, and predictive failure.  
Server chassis  
The electrogalvanized metal used in manufacturing the server chassis  
minimizes electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency  
interference (RFI).  
The peripheral bay provides the interface for 3.5- and 5.25-inch media.  
It can support:  
One 5.25-inch IDE CD-ROM drive in the 5.25-inch half-height bay.  
(Optional: any IDE or single-ended SCSI device, like a tape drive.)  
Two 3.5-inch wide by 1.0- or 1.6-inch hot-swappable low-voltage  
differential SCSI (LVDS) hard disk drives mounted side-by-side in  
the 3.5-inch hot-swapping bays. These bays allow hot-swapping of  
hard disk drives without shutting down the server.  
Ten hot-plug PCI I/O expansion slots (six 33 MHz PCI, four 100 MHz  
PCI-X).  
The plastic front bezel provides airflow and easy access to drives in the  
hot-swapping bays. The removable top covers provide proper airflow  
and easy access to components inside the server. Only technically  
qualified personnel should remove the server covers.  
Cooling system with redundancy  
Six fans (5 + 1) cool and circulate air through the server. The sixth fan  
is redundant. The fans can be replaced—hot-swapped—without  
turning off server power. An LED indicator mounted next to each fan  
guarantees positive identification of the failed fan.  
Integrated power supply fans—two or three—cool and circulate air  
through the power supplies and the bottom of the chassis.  
Server management  
Interintegrated circuit bus (I2C) for diagnostic and intrachassis  
communication. Interchassis management bus (ICMB) for interchassis  
platform management communications.  
Real-time clock/calendar (RTC).  
Front panel controls and indicators (LEDs).  
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), Power-on Self Test (POST), and  
Setup Utility stored in a flash memory device.  
System Setup Utility (SSU).  
QLogicSCSI Utility.  
Emergency Management Port (EMP) utility.  
Field Replacement Unit (FRU) and Sensor Data Record (SDR) load  
utility.  
14  
Chassis Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chassis Front Controls and Indicators  
A
B
C
D E F G  
H
Q
P
O N  
M L  
K J I  
Figure 2. Front Controls and Indicators  
OM07301  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 3.  
Item  
Front Controls and Indicators  
Feature  
Description  
Front Panel  
A
B
C
Power switch  
When pressed, it turns on or off the server. The +5 V standby voltage  
is ON whenever the server is plugged in.  
Reset switch  
NMI switch  
When pressed, it resets the server and causes the power-on self test  
(POST) to run.  
When pressed, it causes a nonmaskable interrupt. This switch is  
recessed behind the front panel to prevent inadvertent activation. It  
must be pressed with a narrow tool (not supplied).  
D
Power LED (green)  
When lit continuously, it indicates the presence of DC power in the  
server. When not lit, it indicates power is turned off or power source is  
disrupted.  
E
F
Power fault LED (yellow)  
When lit continuously, it indicates presence of DC power.  
Cooling fault LED (yellow) When flashing, it indicates a fan failure.  
G
Drive fault LED (yellow)  
When lit continuously, it indicates an asserted fault status on one or  
more hard disk drives in the hot-swapping bay. When flashing, it  
indicates drive reset in progress.  
H
Front panel LCD  
Displays information about processor type and failure codes.  
Status LEDs for SCSI Drives in Hot-swapping Bays  
I
Drive power LED (green)  
When lit continuously, it indicates the presence of the drive and power  
on the drive.  
J
Drive activity LED (green)  
Drive fault LED (yellow)  
Indicates drive activity.  
K
When lit continuously, it indicates an asserted fault status on one or  
more hard disk drives in the hot-swapping bay. When flashing, it  
indicates drive reset in progress.  
Typical CD-ROM Drive  
L
Open/close button  
Activity LED  
When pressed, it opens or closes the CD-ROM tray.  
When lit, it indicates the drive is in use.  
M
N
O
Volume control  
Headphone jack  
It adjusts the volume of headphones or speakers.  
It provides a connection for headphones or speakers.  
3.5-inch Diskette (Floppy) Drive  
P
Activity LED  
When lit, it indicates the drive is in use.  
When pressed, it ejects the diskette.  
Q
Ejector button  
16  
Chassis Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chassis Back Controls and Features  
A
B C D  
E
F
N
G
H
I
J
M
L
K
OM08781  
Figure 3. Chassis Back View  
A. PCI add-in board expansion slots  
B. External LVDS connector  
C. PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin  
D. PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin  
E. PS/2-compatible serial ports A and B, 9-pin RS-232 connector  
F. Super VGA compatible, 15-pin video connector  
G. PS/2-compatible parallel port (LPT), 25-pin bidirectional subminiature D connector  
H. USB ports 0 and 1, 4-pin connector  
I. Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB) connectors port 1 and 2  
J. Power supplies (in this view, supplies must be populated from left to right; the right  
bay would contain the redundant supply)  
K. Power supply failure LED (yellow)  
L. Power supply predictive failure LED (yellow) for power supply fan  
M. Power supply power LED (green)  
N. AC input power connector  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripherals  
The peripheral bay provides the interface for 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch media.  
3.5-inch Diskette Drive  
The 3.5-inch diskette drive in the peripheral bay supports 720 KB and 1.44 MB media. The drive  
is externally accessible from the front of the system.  
3.5-inch Hard Drive Bays  
The peripheral bay contains two hot-swapping bays for two 3.5-inch wide (1.0-inch high or  
1.6-inch high) wide/fast-20 SCSI III SCA-type hard drives. The hard drives are externally  
accessible at the front of the system and connect to a wide LVDS hot-swap SCSI backplane.  
As part of the hot-swap implementation, a drive carrier with an integral heatsink is required. The  
drives are mounted in the carrier with four fasteners and the carrier snaps into the chassis with a  
locking handle. A single metal EMI shield and plastic door cover the drive bays. A hot-swapping  
bay is provided for drives that are 3.5 inches wide and 1.0 or 1.6 inches high. Drives can consume  
up to 24 watts of power and must be specified to run at a maximum ambient temperature of  
40 °C (104 °F).  
5.25-inch Removable Media Device Bay  
The peripheral bay has one 5.25-inch half-height bay that is accessible from the front of the  
system. This bay is intended to provide space for a tape drive for backup or for another removable  
device.  
We recommend that you do not use this bay for a hard disk drive, because hard disk drives  
generate EMI (increasing ESD susceptibility), and because of inadequate cooling.  
18  
Chassis Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hot-Swap Power Supplies  
The chassis can be configured with two or three 750-watt power supplies in a 2 + 1 redundancy  
configuration. If you have three supplies installed, you can hot-swap a failed supply without  
affecting system functionality. If you have two supplies installed, they must occupy the left and  
center bays (as you face the back of the server—see Figure 3 on page 17). Each supply is designed  
to minimize EMI and RFI. This system is designed to operate at 100/200 VAC only.  
The DC output voltages of each power supply are:  
+3.3 V at 36.0 A max  
+5 V at 36.0 A max (total combined output of +3.3 V and +5.5 V not to exceed 195 W)  
+12 V at 36.0 A with 42.0 A <10ms peak  
+24 V at 100 mA  
-12 V at 1.0 A  
+5 V standby 1.0 A  
Each supply docks to a 36-pin connector on the system midplane.  
System Cooling  
The server contains two independent cooling subsystems:  
The upper system, cooling the front panel, profusion carrier, and I/O carrier  
(5 + 1 redundancy)  
The lower system, cooling the memory modules, peripheral bay, and power supplies  
(2 + 1 redundancy)  
Both subsystems offer redundant cooling capabilities. As shipped from the factory, the minimum  
configuration includes six system fans in the upper subsystem and two power supplies (each has an  
integrated fan). You can install one additional power supply.  
NOTE  
All chassis covers must be on the system for proper cooling.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Chassis Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Boardset Description  
The modular scaleable architecture of the SRPL8 rack server supports symmetrical  
multiprocessing (SMP) and a variety of operating systems. The server comes with Peripheral  
Component Interconnect (PCI) and Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) buses. ISA buses are  
used internally only. The system has no ISA slots or a way for the user to make use of the ISA  
bus. The server boardset consists of a set of printed circuit boards:  
Profusion carrier  
Processor mezzanine board(s)  
Front side bus (FSB) terminator modules  
Cache coherency filters  
PCI hot-plug (PHP) I/O carrier  
Low-voltage differential SCSI (LVDS) hot-swap disk backplane  
I/O riser board  
Two memory modules  
Front panel controller board  
Midplane  
The profusion carrier is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis, and the PHP I/O  
carrier is mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis. The carriers plug into connectors  
on the midplane mounted between the two carriers. The midplane interconnects the carriers with  
the memory modules and power supplies. The front panel board is mounted in front of the  
profusion carrier in the same plane. This board provides the user interface, server management,  
cooling system control, and power control.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
C
B
A
E
C
F
OM07505  
Figure 4. Boardset Overview  
A. Front panel board  
B. Profusion carrier  
C. Processor mezzanine board  
D. I/O carrier  
E. Midplane  
F. Memory modules  
Boardset Features  
Table 4.  
Boardset Features  
Feature  
Description  
Profusion carrier  
The profusion carrier provides the interface for processors (via one or two processor  
mezzanine boards), memory modules, and cache coherency filters.  
Processor  
The profusion carrier supports up to two processor mezzanine boards. Each  
mezzanine boards mezzanine board supports up to four Pentum® III Xeon™ processors.  
Pentium III Xeon  
processor  
packaged in an  
S.E.C. cartridge  
Installed: Up to eight Pentium III Xeon processors, packaged in single edge contact  
(S.E.C.) cartridges and installed in 330-pin Slot 2 processor connectors, operating at  
5/12 V. The profusion carrier provides connectors for two processor mezzanine  
boards. Each mezzanine board provides four Slot 2 connectors. The carrier's voltage  
regulator is automatically programmed by the processor's VID pins to provide the  
required voltage.  
continued  
22  
Boardset Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 4.  
Feature  
Boardset Features (continued)  
Description  
Memory modules  
Two dual plug-in modules containing interleaved pathway to main memory supporting  
PC100 registererd SDRAM. Each memory module supports from 128 MB to 16 GB of  
error correction code (ECC) memory using sixteen 72-bit dual inline memory modules  
(DIMMs). The modules interface to the profusion carrier through the midplane.  
This module plugs into any unpopulated Slot 2 connector on either processor  
mezzanine board. The module terminates the FSB GTL+ signals of the  
FSB terminator  
module  
Slot 2 connector when a processor S.E.C. cartridge is not installed in a connector.  
The cache coherency filters contain information on each of the two processor buses,  
thus enabling each bus to perform with minimal snoop cycles. The profusion carrier  
requires that these filters be populated if the server has two processor mezzanine  
boards that are both populated with processors.  
Cache coherency  
filters  
PHP I/O carrier  
Ten hot-pluggable 64-bit PCI expansion slots (six 33 MHz PCI, four 100 MHz PCI-X).  
Integrated ATI Rage XL graphics (SVGA) controller with 8 MB of video memory.  
The QLogic 12160 Ultra 160 LVDS SCSI controller supports two LVDS channels.  
One channel is used internally to provide support for the internal SCSI drives  
(connected to the LVDS hot-swap disk backplane) and CD-ROM or tape drive. The  
second LVDS channel is routed to the rear of the chassis to support external devices.  
The diskette controller supports one drive.  
The PCI-enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) interface supports one IDE bus.  
PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse controller.  
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports.  
I/O riser board  
This board contains all legacy I/O connections; it plugs into an edge connector on the  
PHP I/O carrier.  
PS/2-compatible keyboard and mouse ports (interchangeable).  
PS/2-compatible parallel port.  
Analog VGA, 15-pin video port.  
Two PS/2-compatible, 9-pin serial ports.  
LVDS hot-swap  
disk backplane  
This backplane supports hot-swapping of up to two SCA2-type SCSI drives, mounted  
in carriers, in and out of the hot-swapping bays.  
Front panel board  
The front panel board provides the user interface to the server. The board allows  
other servers to communicate with this server, even while power is down, via an  
Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB).  
Push-button switches control power-up, reset, and nonmaskable interrupt  
(NMI) functions.  
LEDs indicate power on, power supply failure, hard drive failure, or a fan or other  
server cooling failure.  
An LCD panel provides information about boot status, available number of  
processors, and other server management information.  
Midplane  
The midplane:  
Electrically connects the PHP I/O and profusion carriers  
Contains the sockets for the memory modules  
Distributes DC power to the PHP I/O and profusion carrier, disk backplane, cooling  
fans, memory boards, and front panel board  
Distributes the power load of the server among two or three 750-watt autoranging  
power supplies  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Processor Overview  
Each Pentium III Xeon processor is packaged in a single edge contact (S.E.C.) cartridge. The  
cartridge includes:  
The processor core with an integrated 32 KB primary (L1) cache  
The secondary (L2) cache  
A thermal plate  
A back cover  
Processors used with the SRPL8 server must be:  
5/12 volts  
100 MHz FSB  
1 or 2 MB cache  
Validated by Intel for SRPL8 systems  
Each processor implements the MMXtechnology with streaming SMID extensions and  
maintains full backward compatibility with the 8086, 80286, Intel386, Intel486, Pentium, and  
Pentium Pro processors. The processors numeric coprocessor significantly increases the speed of  
floating-point operations and complies with ANSI/IEEE standard 754-1985.  
Each S.E.C. cartridge connects to one of two processor mezzanine boards through a 330-pin  
Slot 2 edge connector (SC330.1). The cartridge is secured to the mezzanine carrier by a retention  
bracket. Each mezzanine board connects to the profusion carrier. Depending on configuration,  
your system has one to eight processors.  
The processor external interface is multiprocessor (MP)-ready and operates at 100 MHz. The  
processor contains a local APIC unit for interrupt handling in MP and uniprocessor  
(UP) environments.  
The L2 cache is located on the same die as the processor core and L1 cache. The cache:  
Is offered in 1 MB and 2 MB configurations  
Is ECC protected  
Operates at the full core clock rate  
24  
Boardset Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Overview  
Main memory resides on two add-in boards, called memory modules. Each memory module  
contains slots for 16 DIMMs and is attached to the profusion carrier through a 300-pin connector  
on the midplane. The memory controller supports PC 100-registered SDRAM DIMMs. Various  
DIMM sizes are supported, but each DIMM must be at least 128 MB. Memory amounts from  
128 MB to 16 GB per module are supported. The ECC used for the memory module is capable of  
correcting single-bit errors (SBEs) and detecting 100% of double-bit errors over one code word.  
Nibble error detection is also provided.  
You can install:  
From 1 to 32 DIMMs (total number of DIMMs for two memory modules)  
Equal number of DIMMs on each memory module (except when only one DIMM is used)  
NOTE  
When only a single memory module is installed, DIMM sizes on that  
module may vary, but when both memory modules are installed, the DIMM  
configuration on the two modules should be identical to support memory  
interleaving for performance gains.  
Depending on how the memory modules are installed, the memory subsystem can operate in two  
different modes: interleaved and single-port.  
Interleaved mode (two memory modules installed): The memory modules share a common  
address range. One memory module responds to even-numbered cache lines, while the other  
responds to odd-numbered cache lines. This configuration offers the highest performance  
because it allows the two modules to be used in a balanced fashion, reducing address conflicts.  
To operate in interleaved mode, the DIMMs MUST BE INSTALLED IN PAIRS (ONE ON  
EACH MODULE) AND IN THE SAME LOCATIONS ON EACH MODULE.  
Single port mode (one memory module installed): The single memory module responds to all  
memory addresses. The DIMMs on this single carrier need not be installed in pairs and can be  
installed one DIMM at a time.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIMM Installation Sequence  
A single carrier will support DIMM population in various configurations (empty sockets included).  
However, when fewer than 16 DIMMs are installed on a memory module, the preferred population  
order is to start from the lowest J number and populate sequentially to the highest. This  
recommendation helps maintain optimal signal integrity and thermal performance.  
NOTE  
Maximum capacity is limited to 16 GB with one memory module installed.  
This increases to 32 GB with two modules.  
Some OSs and application programs use base memory while others use both conventional and  
extended memory. Examples:  
Base memory: MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows NT, and UNIX†  
Conventional and extended memory: OS/2, Windows NT, and UNIX  
MS-DOS does not use extended memory; however, some MS-DOS utility programs like RAM  
disks, disk caches, print spoolers, and windowing environments use extended memory for better  
performance.  
BIOS automatically detects, sizes, and initializes the memory array, depending on the type, size,  
and speed of the installed DIMMs, and reports memory size and allocation to the system via  
configuration registers.  
NOTE  
DIMM sizes and compatibility: Use DIMMs that have been tested for  
compatibility. Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of  
approved DIMMs.  
26  
Boardset Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripherals  
Super I/O Chip  
The 37C937 Super I/O device supports two serial ports, one parallel port, diskette drive, and  
PS/2-compatible keyboard and mouse. The system provides the connector interface for each port.  
Serial Ports  
Both serial ports are relocatable. By default, port A is physically the left connector (as you look at  
the back of the system — see Figure 3 on page 17), port B the right connector. Each serial port  
can be set to one of four different COMx ports, and each can be enabled separately. When  
enabled, each port can be programmed to generate edge- or level-sensitive interrupts. When  
disabled, serial port interrupts are available to add-in boards.  
Parallel Port  
The 25/15-pin connector stacks the parallel port over the VGA. The 37C937 provides one  
IEEE 1284-compatible 25-pin bidirectional EPP (supporting levels 1.7 and 1.9). BIOS  
programming of the Super I/O registers enables the parallel port and determines the port address  
and interrupt. When disabled, the interrupt is available to add-in boards.  
Add-In Board Slots  
The I/O carrier has ten 64-bit PCI buses contained in four PCI segments:  
PCI-A provides for PCI slots 1 and 2 (33 MHz), dual-channel LVDS SCSI controller, video,  
and PIIX4E.  
The PIIX4E controls communications to IDE, onboard ISA, USB, and Super I/O for  
handling the keyboard, mouse, diskette drive, parallel port, and serial ports.  
PCI-B provides for PCI slots 3 through 6 (33 MHz).  
PCI-C provides for slots 7 and 8 (two of the 100 MHz PCI-X, 3.3 V slots).  
PCI-D provides for slots 9 and 10 (the two other 100 MHz PCI-X, 3.3 V slots).  
Video  
The onboard, integrated ATI Rage XL 64-bit VGA chip contains an SVGA controller that is fully  
compatible with legacy video standards. The standard system configuration comes with 8 MB of  
onboard SDRAM memory. The video controller supports pixel resolutions of up to 1600 x 1200 at  
85 Hz and up to 16.7 M colors.  
The SVGA controller supports analog VGA monitors (single and multiple frequency, interlaced  
and noninterlaced) with a maximum vertical retrace noninterlaced frequency of up to 100 Hz.  
You cannot add video memory to this system. Depending on the environment, the controller  
displays up to 16.7 M colors in some video resolutions. It also provides hardware-accelerated bit  
block transfers (BITBLT) of data.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Controller  
A QLogic 12160 Ultra 160 SCSI chip provides two 16-bit high-speed SCSI channels. This  
high-performance SCSI controller is capable of providing data rates up to 160 MB/sec per channel  
in 16-bit operations to ensure maximum data throughput while minimizing PCI bus overhead.  
Each channel is capable of operations using either 8- or 16-bit SCSI providing 10 MB/sec  
(Fast-10) or 20 MB/sec (Fast-20) throughput, or 20 MB/sec (Ultra), 40 MB/sec (Ultra-wide),  
80 MB/sec (40 MHz) (Ultra-2), or 160 MB/sec (40 MHz double clocked) (Ultra 160).  
The QLA12160 has its own set of PCI configuration registers and SCSI I/O registers. As a  
PCI 2.1 bus master, the controller supports burst data transfers on PCI up to the maximum rate of  
132 MB/sec using on-chip buffers.  
In the hot-swap SCSI hard drive bay, the system supports up to two 1-inch SCSI hard disk drives.  
The 5.25-inch removable media bay supports one SCSI or IDE device (the controller itself  
supports more devices, but the 5.25-inch bay can contain a maximum of one device). SCSI  
devices do not need to operate at the ultra transfer rate. All drives on the bus must be Ultra 160  
(LVD) to run at 160 MB/sec. The 5, 10, and 20 MHz operations can coexist on the bus, and each  
device will interact at its appropriate speed.  
No logic, termination, or resistor loads are required to connect devices to the SCSI controller other  
than termination in the device at the end of the cable. The SCSI bus is terminated on the  
I/O carrier with active terminators.  
IDE Controller  
IDE is a 16-bit interface for intelligent disk drives with ATdisk controller electronics onboard.  
The PCI/ISA/IDE Accelerator, called PIIX4E, is a multifunction device on the I/O carrier that acts  
as a PCI-based Fast IDE controller. The device controls:  
PIO and IDE DMA/bus master operations  
Mode 4 timings  
Transfer rates up to 22 MB/sec (33 MB/sec using ultra DMA transfers)  
Buffering for PCI/IDE burst transfers  
Master/slave IDE mode  
Keyboard and Mouse  
The PS/2 compatible keyboard and mouse connectors are mounted in a single-stacked housing  
with the mouse connector over the keyboard. External to the system, they appear as two  
connectors.  
The user can plug in the keyboard and mouse to either connector before powering up the system.  
BIOS detects these and configures the keyboard controller accordingly.  
The keyboard controller is functionally compatible with the 8042A microcontroller. The system  
can be locked automatically if no keyboard or mouse activity occurs for a predefined length of  
time, if specified through the SSU (see security options in Security Add-Inon page 57). Once  
the inactivity (lockout) timer has expired, the keyboard and mouse do not respond until the  
previously stored password is entered.  
28  
Boardset Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Server Management  
Most of the server management features are implemented using three microcontrollers, the  
baseboard management controller (BMC) on the I/O carrier, the front panel controller (FPC) on the  
front panel board, and the hot-swap controller (HSC) on the LVDS backplane.  
The primary function of the BMC is to autonomously monitor system platform management events  
and log their occurrence in the nonvolatile System Event Log (SEL). While monitoring, the BMC  
maintains the nonvolatile sensor data record repository (SDRR), from which run-time information  
can be retrieved. The BMC provides an ISA host interface to SDRR information, so software  
running on the server can poll and retrieve the current status of the platform. A shared register  
interface is defined for this purpose.  
SEL contents can be retrieved after system failure or during regularly scheduled maintenance. To  
retrieve SEL contents, field service personnel use tools such as the SSU SEL Viewer or the  
Intel® Server Control management software.  
The BMC:  
Provides temperature and voltage monitoring  
Monitors processor presence and performs Fault Resilient Booting (FRB) control  
Manages SEL interface  
Manages SDRR interface  
Manages SDR/SEL timestamp clock  
Provides Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) information interface  
Provides system management watchdog timer functions  
Provides pre-timeout (of watchdog timer) SMI capability  
Provides front panel NMI handling  
Provides event receiver functionality  
Manages ISA host and Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) interface  
Manages secure mode control, front panel lock/unlock initiation, and video blank and diskette  
write protect monitoring and control  
Provides sensor event initialization agent  
ACPI Support  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Panel Controller (FPC)  
The FPC manages:  
Server power control consolidation from several sources  
push-button power signal from the front panel connector  
real-time clock (RTC)  
Intel® remote management card (IRMC), if installed  
commands from the Intelligent Platform Management Bus  
Power and reset switch interfaces  
Fault LEDs  
Chassis, midplane and power supplies Field Replacement Unit (FRU) inventory interface  
Server hard reset generation  
Server power fault indication  
Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB) bridge device  
EMP connection  
LCD interface  
Fan predictive failure detection and indicator control  
Power supply predictive failure detection and indicator control  
ACPI Support  
Wake on LANvia Magic Packetsupport  
Hot-swap Controller (HSC)  
The HSC:  
Implements the SAF-TE command set  
Controls the fault lights and drive power-on  
Provides a path for management information via SCSI  
Retrieves drive fault status, backplane temperature, and fan failure information via the IPMB  
Queries the status of the front panel controller for power supply information  
Controls drive power-on and power-down, facilitating hot-swapping  
30  
Boardset Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Security  
There are several ways to prevent unauthorized entry or use of the server.  
Security with BIOS Setup:  
Set server administrative and user passwords.  
Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel  
controls.  
For more information, see “Security Menu” on page 45.  
Security with the System Setup Utility (SSU):  
Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the  
keyboard and mouse after a specified time-out period of 1 to 128 minutes.  
Set an administrative password.  
Set a user password.  
Activate the secure mode hot-key.  
Disable writing to the diskette drive.  
For more information, see “Security Add Inon page 57.  
Password Protection  
BIOS passwords prevent unauthorized tampering with the server. If you set the user password, but  
not the administrative password, BIOS requires you to enter the user password before you can boot  
the server or run the SSU. If you set both passwords, entering either password lets you boot the  
server or enable the keyboard and mouse. Only the administrative password lets you change the  
server configuration with the flash-resident Setup utility.  
Secure Boot Mode  
Secure boot mode allows the server to boot and run the OS. However, you cannot use the  
keyboard or the mouse until you enter the user password.  
You can use Setup to put the server in secure boot mode. If BIOS detects a disk in the CD-ROM  
drive or a diskette in floppy drive A at boot time, it prompts you for a password. When you enter  
the password, the server boots from the disk in the CD-ROM drive or the diskette in drive A.  
Entering a password also disables secure mode.  
If there is no disk in the CD-ROM drive or diskette in drive A, the server boots from drive C and  
automatically goes into secure mode. All enabled secure mode features go into effect at boot time.  
If you set a hot-key combination, you can secure the server immediately.  
Boot Sequence Control  
The BIOS security features determine the boot devices and the boot sequence. They also control  
disabling writes to the diskette drive in secure mode. You can use the SSU or Setup to select each  
boot device. The default boot sequence is diskette, hard disk, CD-ROM, and network.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Boot Without Keyboard  
The server can boot with or without a keyboard. Before it boots, BIOS displays a message  
keyboard detection. During POST, BIOS automatically detects and tests the keyboard if one is  
present.  
Locked Power and Reset Switches  
The power and reset push-button switches on the front panel are locked when the server is in  
secure mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.  
Diskette Write Protect  
If Diskette Write Protect is enabled in Setup, it write-protects the diskette drive only while the  
server is in the secure mode. To exit secure mode, enter your user password.  
Video Blanking  
If Video Blanking is enabled in Setup, the video display will be off when the server is in secure  
mode. To exit secure mode, enter your user password.  
Emergency Management Port (EMP)  
The EMP is a feature of server management. EMP lets the front panel controller (FPC)  
communicate with the server via the serial port even if the server power is off. To restrict  
EMP access, you can enable an administrator password in Setup. If the administrator enters a new  
EMP password or clears an old one, BIOS sends the appropriate command via the I2C bus  
interface to the FPC. To change the password from Setup again, enter the new password twice.  
If the administrator sets the Password Clear switch to the Clear position, BIOS clears the  
administrator and user passwords (to change switches, see “Configuration Switches” on page 182).  
It also attempts to clear the EMP password. If the FPC is not present or is not functioning  
properly, BIOS times out and continues.  
32  
Boardset Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Configuration Software and Utilities  
This chapter describes the Power-on Self Test (POST) and system configuration utilities. Table 5  
briefly describes the utilities.  
Table 5.  
Utility  
Configuration Utilities  
Description and brief procedure  
Page  
BIOS Setup (“Setup”)  
You can use Setup to change system configuration defaults.  
35  
If the system does not have a diskette drive, or the drive is  
disabled or misconfigured, use Setup to enable it.  
Or, you can move the CMOS switch on the system board from the  
default setting (Protect CMOS memory) to the Clear setting; this  
will allow most system configurations to boot. For the procedure to  
do this, see “CMOS Clear Switch” on page 183. Then run the SSU  
to configure the system.  
System Setup Utility (SSU)  
Use for extended system configuration of onboard resources and  
add-in boards, viewing the system event log (SEL), setting boot  
device priority, or setting system security options.  
51  
The SSU can be run from either the configuration software  
CD-ROM or from a set DOS-bootable diskettes. See the printed  
Quick Start Guide to make a set of SSU diskettes.  
Information entered via the SSU overrides information entered via  
Setup.  
Direct Platform Control  
(DPC) Console  
Use to access and monitor the server remotely.  
63  
72  
FRUSDR Load Utility  
Use to update the Field Replacement Unit (FRU), Sensor Data  
Record (SDR), and Desktop Management Interface (DMI) flash  
components.  
BIOS Update Utility  
Firmware Update Utility  
QLogic SCSI Utility  
Use to update BIOS or recover from a corrupted BIOS update.  
Use to update the BMC flash PROM.  
77  
80  
80  
Use to configure or view the settings of the SCSI host adapters  
and onboard SCSI devices in the system.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hot Keys  
Use the keyboard’s numeric pad to enter numbers and symbols.  
Table 6.  
Hot Keys  
To do this:  
Press these keys  
Clear memory and reload the operating  
system this is a system reset.  
<Ctrl+Alt+Del>  
Secure your system immediately.  
<Ctrl+Alt> + hotkey (Set your hot-key combination with the SSU  
or Setup.)  
Enter BIOS Setup during BIOS POST.  
Abort memory test during BIOS POST.  
F2  
ESC (Press while BIOS is updating memory size on screen.)  
Power-on Self Test (POST)  
Each time you turn on the system, POST starts running. POST checks the carriers, processors,  
memory, keyboard, and most installed peripheral devices. During the memory test, POST displays  
the amount of memory it is able to access and test. The length of time needed to test memory  
depends on the amount of memory installed. POST is stored in flash memory.  
1. Turn on your video monitor and system. After a few seconds, POST begins to run.  
2. After the memory test, these screen prompts and messages appear:  
Keyboard Detected  
Mouse Initialized  
Press <F2> to enter Setup  
3. If you do not press <F2> and do NOT have a device with an OS loaded, the above message  
remains for a few seconds while the boot process continues, and the system beeps once. Then  
this message appears:  
Operating System not found  
(To create software installation diskettes, see the printed Quick Start Guide.)  
If you do not press <F2>, the boot process continues and this message appears:  
Press <Ctrl><C> to enter SCSI Utility  
4. Press <Ctrl+C> if SCSI devices are installed. When the utility opens, follow the displayed  
instructions to configure the onboard SCSI host adapter settings and to run the SCSI utilities.  
Also see “Using the QLogic SCSI Utility” on page 80. If you do not enter the SCSI utility, the  
boot process continues.  
5. Press <Esc> during POST to access a boot menu when POST finishes. From this menu, you  
can choose the boot device or enter BIOS Setup.  
After POST completes, the system beeps once.  
What appears next on the screen depends on if you have an OS loaded on the server (or which OS).  
If the system halts before POST completes running, it emits a beep code indicating a critical  
system error that requires immediate attention. If POST can display a message on the video  
display screen, the speaker beeps twice as the message appears.  
34  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note the screen display and write down the beep code you hear; this information is useful for your  
service representative. For a listing of beep codes and error messages that POST can generate, see  
Chapter 7, “Solving Problems,” beginning on page 155.  
Using BIOS Setup  
This section describes BIOS Setup options. Use Setup to change the system configuration  
defaults. You can run Setup with or without an OS being present. Setup stores most of the  
configuration values in battery-backed CMOS; the rest of the values are stored in flash memory.  
The values take effect when you boot the system. POST uses these values to configure the  
hardware; if the values and the actual hardware do not agree, POST generates an error message.  
You must then run Setup to specify the correct configuration.  
Run Setup: you can run Setup to modify any standard PC ATfeature such as:  
Select diskette drive  
Select parallel port  
Select serial port  
Set time/date (to be stored in RTC)  
Configure IDE hard drive  
Specify boot device sequence  
Enable SCSI BIOS  
Run SSU, not Setup: You must run the SSU instead of Setup to do the following:  
Enter or change information about a board  
Alter system resources (e.g., interrupts, memory addresses, I/O assignments) to user-selected  
choices instead of choices selected by the BIOS resource manager  
Record Your Setup Settings  
Worksheets for recording your settings are in Appendix B, “Equipment Log and Configuration  
Worksheets”, starting on page 197. If the default values ever need to be restored (after a CMOS  
clear, for example), you must run Setup again. Referring to the worksheets could make your task  
easier.  
If You Cannot Access Setup  
If the diskette drive is misconfigured so that you cannot access it to run a utility from a diskette,  
you might need to clear CMOS memory. You must open the system, change a jumper setting, use  
Setup to check and set diskette drive options, and change the jumper back. For a step-by-step  
procedure, see "CMOS Clear Switch" on page 183.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Setup  
You can enter and start Setup under several conditions:  
When you turn on the system, after POST completes the memory test.  
When you reboot the system by pressing <Ctrl+Alt+Del> while at the DOS operating system  
prompt.  
When you have moved the CMOS switch to the “Clear CMOS” position (enabled); for a  
step-by-step procedure, see “CMOS Clear Switch” on page 183.  
In the three conditions listed above, after rebooting, you will see this prompt:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
In a fourth condition, when CMOS/NVRAM has been corrupted, you will see other prompts but  
not the <F2> prompt:  
Warning: cmos checksum invalid  
Warning: cmos time and date not set  
In this condition, BIOS will load default values for CMOS and attempt to boot.  
Setup Menus  
Setup has six major menus and several submenus:  
1. Main Menu  
IDE submenu  
Keyboard Features submenu  
2. Advanced Menu  
PCI Configuration submenu  
PCI Mode submenu  
I/O Device Configuration submenu  
Advanced Chipset Control submenu  
3. Security Menu  
4. Server Menu  
System Management submenu  
Console Redirection submenu  
5. Boot Menu  
Boot Device Priority submenu  
Hard Drive submenu  
6. Exit Menu  
When you see this:  
What it means:  
On screen, an option is shown but you  
cannot select it or move to that field.  
You cannot change or configure the option in that menu screen.  
Either the option is autoconfigured or autodetected, or you must  
use a different Setup screen, or you must use the SSU.  
On screen, the phrase Press Enter  
appears next to the option.  
Press <Enter> to display a submenu that is either a separate  
full-screen menu or a pop-up menu with one or more choices.  
36  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The rest of this section lists the features that display onscreen after you press <F2> to enter Setup.  
Not all of the option choices are described, because (1) a few are not user-selectable but are  
displayed for your information, and (2) many of the choices are relatively self-explanatory.  
Press  
F1  
To  
Get help about an item.  
ESC  
Go back to a previous item.  
Select the previous value in a menu option list.  
Select the next value in a menu option list.  
Select a major menu.  
← →  
-
Change the value of the current menu item to the previous value.  
Change the value of the current menu item to the next value.  
Activate submenus, select feature options, and change feature values.  
Display the following message:  
+
Enter  
F9  
Setup Confirmation  
Load default configuration now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
The [Yes] button will be highlighted. If you press <Enter>, all Setup fields return to their  
default values. If you press <ESC> or select No, the server returns to the configuration it  
had before you pressed <F9>, without affecting any existing field values.  
F10  
Display the following message:  
Setup Confirmation  
Save configuration changes and exit now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
The [Yes] button will be highlighted. If you press <Enter>, all current Setup values are  
saved, and the system is reset. If you press <ESC> or select No, the server returns to  
the configuration it had before you pressed <F10>, without affecting any existing values.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Menu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
System Time  
System Date  
Legacy Diskette A:  
HH:MM:SS  
MM/DD/YYYY  
Sets the System Time.  
Sets the System Date.  
Disabled  
Selects the floppy diskette type for drive A.  
360 KB, 5 ¼”  
1.2 MB, 5 ¼”  
720 KB, 3 ½”  
1.44/1.25 MB, 3 ½”  
2.88 MB, 3 ½”  
Legacy Diskette B:  
Disabled  
Selects the floppy diskette type for drive B.  
360 KB, 5 ¼”  
1.2 MB, 5 ¼”  
720 KB, 5 ¼”  
1.44/1.25 MB, 3 ½”  
2.88 MB, 3 ½”  
Primary Master  
Primary Slave  
Selects IDE submenu.  
Selects IDE submenu.  
Processor Information  
Keyboard Features  
Language  
Selects Processor Information submenu.  
Selects Keyboard Features submenu.  
Selects the language used by BIOS.  
English (US)  
French  
German  
Italian  
Spanish  
38  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IDE Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Type  
None  
If "Auto" is selected, BIOS determines the parameters  
during POST.  
If "User" is selected, BIOS Setup prompts the user to fill in  
the drive parameters. Drive types 1 through 39 are  
predetermined drive types.  
CD-ROM  
IDE Removable  
ATAPI Removable  
User  
Auto  
Cylinders  
Displays the number of cylinders.  
Heads  
Displays the number of read/write heads.  
Displays the number of sectors per track.  
Displays the capacity of the drive.  
Sectors  
Maximum Capacity  
Multisector Transfers  
Disabled  
2 sectors  
4 sectors  
8 sectors  
16 sectors  
Displays status of multisector transfers. Autotyped by  
BIOS.  
LBA Mode Control  
32-bit I/O  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Displays status of Logical Block Access. Autotyped by  
BIOS.  
Disabled  
Enables 32-bit IDE data transfers.  
Enabled  
Transfer Mode  
Standard  
Fast PIO 1  
Fast PIO 2  
Fast PIO 3  
Fast PIO 4  
Selects the method for transferring data to/from the drive.  
Autotyped by BIOS.  
Ultra-DMA Mode  
Disabled  
Mode 0  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Selects the Ultra-DMA mode used for transferring data  
to/from the drive. Autotyped by BIOS.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Processor Information Submenu  
Item  
Description  
Board 1 Processor 1 Stepping ID  
Board 1 Processor 1 L2 Cache Size  
Board 1 Processor 2 Stepping ID  
Board 1 Processor 2 L2 Cache Size  
Board 1 Processor 3 Stepping ID  
Board 1 Processor 3 L2 Cache Size  
Board 1 Processor 4 Stepping ID  
Board 1 Processor 4 L2 Cache Size  
Board 2 Processor 1 Stepping ID  
Board 2 Processor 1 L2 Cache Size  
Board 2 Processor 2 Stepping ID  
Board 2 Processor 2 L2 Cache Size  
Board 2 Processor 3 Stepping ID  
Board 2 Processor 3 L2 Cache Size  
Board 2 Processor 4 Stepping ID  
Board 2 Processor 4 L2 Cache Size  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Displays the processor stepping.  
Displays the L2 cache size.  
Keyboard Features Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Num Lock  
Auto  
On  
Selects power-on state for Num Lock key.  
Off  
Key Click  
Disabled  
Enables key click.  
Enabled  
Keyboard auto-repeat rate  
30/sec  
26.7/sec  
21.8/sec  
18.5/sec  
13.3/sec  
10/sec  
Selects key repeat rate.  
6/sec  
2/sec  
Keyboard auto-repeat delay  
1/4 sec  
1/2 sec  
3/4 sec  
1 sec  
Selects delay before key repeat.  
40  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Menu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
WARNING  
Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to  
malfunction.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Processor Serial Number  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables or disables the Processor Serial Number feature  
of the Pentium III Xeon processor.  
Reset Configuration Data  
No  
Yes  
If "Yes" is selected, BIOS clears the System  
Configuration Data during the next boot. The field is  
automatically reset to "No" in next boot.  
Use Multiprocessor  
Specification  
1.1  
1.4  
Selects the version of the Multiprocessor Specification to  
use. Some operating systems require version 1.1 for  
compatibility reasons.  
Large Disk Access Mode  
CHS  
LBA  
Select the drive access method for IDE drives. Most  
operating systems use Logical Block Addressing (LBA).  
However, some operating systems may use the Cylinder  
Head Sector (CHS). See your operating system  
documentation for more information.  
Pause Before Boot  
Disabled  
Enabled  
If enabled, BIOS pauses five-seconds before booting the  
operating system.  
Hot-plug PCI Master Control  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Set to "Enable" to create the Hot-plug PCI Resource  
Table and to reserve resources for each hot-plug PCI  
slot.  
Hot-plug PCI Allocation Level  
Timeout on POST errors  
Disabled:  
Min.  
Max.  
Set amount of resources to allocate to empty hot-plug  
PCI slots.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
If enabled, boots operating system after 5 seconds of  
displaying POST errors. If disabled, waits for user to  
press F1 or F2.  
PCI Configuration  
Selects PCI Configuration submenu.  
I/O Device Configuration  
Advanced Chipset Control  
Selects I/O Device Configuration submenu.  
Selects Advanced Chipset Control submenu.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCI Configuration Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Processor Bus  
PCI Slots 1-2  
PCI Slots 3-6  
PCI Slots 7-8  
100 MHz  
PCI 33  
Displays the clock speed of the Processor Bus.  
Displays the clock speed and setting of PCI Segment A.  
Displays the clock speed and setting of PCI Segment B.  
Displays the clock speed and setting of PCI Segment C.  
PCI 33  
PCI 33  
PCI 66  
PCI-X 66  
PCI-X 100  
PCI Slots 9-10  
PCI 33  
Displays the clock speed and setting of PCI Segment D.  
PCI 66  
PCI-X 66  
PCI-X 100  
PCI Bus Default  
PCI 33  
PCI 66  
PCI-X 66  
PCI-X 100  
If no cards are present behind a PCI-X capable bus, this  
selects the capabilities of that empty bus. If cards are  
present, this option is ignored and the slot speed is  
automatically determined.  
PCI Device, Embedded SCSI  
Selects PCI Mode submenu for the embedded  
LVDS controller.  
PCI Slot 1  
PCI Slot 2  
PCI Slot 3  
PCI Slot 4  
PCI Slot 5  
PCI Slot 6  
PCI Slot 7  
PCI Slot 8  
PCI Slot 9  
PCI Slot 10  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI-X slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI-X slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI-X slot.  
Selects PCI Mode Submenu for this PCI-X slot.  
PCI Mode Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Option ROM Scan  
Disabled  
Enables option ROM scan.  
Enabled  
Enable Master  
Latency Timer  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables device(s) as a PCI bus master.  
Default  
0020h  
0040h  
0060h  
0080h  
00A0h  
00C0h  
00E0h  
Specifies the minimum guaranteed number of PCI bus clocks  
that a device can master on a PCI bus during one  
transaction.  
42  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Device Configuration Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Serial Port A  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
If set to "Auto", BIOS configures the port.  
Base I/O Address  
3F8h  
Selects the base I/O address for COM port A.  
2F8h  
3E8h  
2E8h  
Interrupt  
IRQ3  
Selects the IRQ for COM port A.  
IRQ4  
Serial Port B  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
If set to "Auto", BIOS configures the port.  
Base I/O Address  
3F8h  
Selects the base I/O address for COM port B.  
2F8h  
3E8h  
2E8h  
Interrupt  
IRQ3  
Selects the IRQ for COM port B.  
IRQ4  
Parallel Port  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
If set to "Auto", BIOS configures the port  
Mode  
Output only  
Bidirectional  
EPP  
Selects the mode of the LPT port.  
ECP  
Base I/O Address  
378h  
278h  
178h  
Selects the base I/O address for LPT port. 178h is only  
available when the LPT port is in EPP mode. Otherwise,  
3BCh is available.  
3BCh  
Interrupt  
IRQ5  
Selects the IRQ for LPT port.  
IRQ7  
DMA channel  
Floppy disk controller  
DMA 1  
DMA 3  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
Selects the DMA channel for LPT port when configured for  
ECP mode.  
Enables embedded floppy disk controller.  
OS Controlled  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Chipset Control Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Extended RAM Step  
1 MB  
1 KB  
Every location  
Selects the thoroughness of the extended memory test. If  
“1 MB” is selected, BIOS tests each 1 MB boundary.  
If “1KB” is selected, BIOS tests each 1 KB boundary.  
If "Every location" is selected, BIOS tests every byte. BIOS  
defaults to the fastest test.  
L2 Cache  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables the second level cache. The second level cache  
should be disabled only for diagnostic purposes.  
Multiboot Support  
Override PHP Switches  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables Boot Device Selection.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
If enabled, the individual slot switches cannot power down  
the slots. If disabled, the power to each slot can be removed  
by the individual slot switches.  
2 GB Memory Limit  
Disabled  
Enabled  
If enabled, BIOS limits the top of memory to 2 GB. Additional  
memory becomes inaccessible.  
44  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security Menu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
User Password Is  
Set  
Clear  
Status only. Administrator password must be enabled  
before user password can be enabled. User password is  
enabled by entering a user password and disabled by  
entering a null user password.  
Administrator Password Is  
Set  
Clear  
Status only. Enabled by entering an administrator  
password and disabled by entering a null administrator  
password.  
Set User Password  
Press Enter  
Press Enter  
When the Enter key is pressed, the user is prompted for a  
password; press ESC key to abort.  
Set Administrator Password  
Password on Boot  
When the Enter key is pressed, the user is prompted for a  
password; press ESC key to abort.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Requires password entry on boot. The system remains in  
Secure Mode until password is entered. Password on  
Boot takes precedence over Secure Mode Boot.  
Secure Mode Timer  
Disabled  
1 min  
2 min  
5 min  
10 min  
20 min  
1 hr  
Sets the period of key/PS2 mouse inactivity specified  
before Secure Mode activates. Requires a password for  
Secure Mode to function.  
2 hr  
Secure Mode Hot Key  
(Ctrl+Alt+X)  
Disabled  
[“X” = A-Z]  
Assigns a hot key that invokes Secure Mode.  
Secure Mode Boot  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled system boots in the secure mode. Requires a  
password to unlock the system.  
Video Blanking  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Blank video when Secure Mode is activated. Requires a  
password to unlock the system.  
Floppy Write Protect  
Disabled  
Enabled  
When Secure Mode is activated, the floppy drive is write-  
protected. Requires a password to re-enable floppy  
writes.  
Front Panel Lockout  
Disabled  
Enabled  
When Secure Mode is activated, the Reset and Power  
switches are locked. Requires a password is required to  
unlock the system.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Server Menu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
System Management  
Console Redirection  
Processor Retest  
Selects System Management submenu.  
Selects Console Redirection submenu.  
No  
Yes  
Select “Yes” to clear historical processor status and retest  
all processors on the next boot.  
EMP Password Switch  
Disabled  
Enables the EMP password.  
Enabled  
EMP Password  
Selects the EMP password.  
EMP ESC Sequence  
EMP Hangup Line String  
Updated from the Front Panel Controller firmware.  
Updated from the Front Panel Controller firmware.  
Updated from the Front Panel Controller firmware.  
Modem Initialization  
String  
High Modem Initialization  
String  
Updated from the Front Panel Controller firmware.  
EMP Access Mode  
Preboot Only  
Always Active  
Disabled  
Selected when the EMP is enabled.  
Preboot Only: EMP is enabled during power down or POST  
only.  
Always Active: EMP is always enabled.  
Disabled: EMP is disabled.  
EMP Restricted Mode  
Access  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables Restricted Mode. In Restricted Mode, Power  
Down, Front Panel NMI, and Reset Control via EMP are  
disabled.  
EMP Direct  
Connect/Modem Mode  
Direct Connect Allows the user to connect to a local machine without using  
Modem Mode  
a modem.  
46  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management Submenu  
Default values are in bold typeface.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Firmware SMIs  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables SMI generation by agents on the Intelligent  
Platform Management Bus (IPMB). Because BIOS  
requires SMIs for various tasks, setting this field to  
disabled does not disable all sources of SMIs.  
System Event Logging  
Clear Event Log  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled: logs critical system events.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Clears the System Event Log (SEL). This option is reset  
to Disabled on each boot.  
Memory Scrubbing  
AERR Enable  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables memory scrubbing by the Profusion chip set.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables AERR to be asserted on the processor host  
buses.  
Assert NMI on BERR  
Assert NMI on PERR  
Assert NMI on SERR  
Enable Host Bus Error  
FPC Error Check  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables BERR to be reported as a critical event via NMI.  
Requires SERR to be enabled as well.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables PERR to be reported as a critical event via NMI.  
Requires SERR to be enabled as well.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables SERR to be reported as a critical event via NMI.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables ECC checking on the processor buses.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables Front Panel Controller (FPC) checking. If  
enabled, BIOS verifies that it can communicate with the  
FPC.  
HSC Error Check  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enables Hot-swap Controller (HSC) checking. If  
enabled, BIOS verifies that it can communicate with the  
HSC.  
Server Management Information  
Selects Server Management Information submenu.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Server Management Information Submenu  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Board Part Number  
Board Serial Number  
System Part Number  
System Serial Number  
Chassis Part Number  
Chassis Serial Number  
BMC Revision  
Displays Board Part Number.  
Displays Board Serial Number.  
Displays System Part Number.  
Displays System Serial Number.  
Displays Chassis Part Number.  
Displays Chassis Serial Number.  
Displays Baseboard Management Controller Revision.  
Displays Front Panel Controller Revision.  
Displays Hot-swap Controller Revision.  
FPC Revision  
HSC Revision  
Console Redirection Submenu  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
COM Port Address  
Disabled  
3F8  
When enabled, use the I/O port specified.  
2F8  
3E8  
IRQ #  
3
When enabled, use the IRQ specified.  
4
COM Port Baud  
Rate  
9600 K  
19.2 K  
38.4 K  
115.2 K  
When enabled, use the baud rate specified. The maximum  
baud rate supported by the Emergency Management Port is  
19.2K.  
Flow Control  
No Flow Control  
CTS/RTS  
When enabled, use the flow control type specified.  
XON/XOFF  
CTS/RTS + CD  
48  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Boot Menu  
Boot Menu options allow the user to select the boot device. The following table shows an example  
list of devices ordered in priority of the boot invocation. Items can be reprioritized by using the  
Up and Down arrow keys to select the device. Once the device is selected, use the + (plus) key to  
move the device higher in the boot priority list. Use the – (minus) key to move the device lower in  
the boot priority list.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Floppy Check  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled speeds up the boot process.  
Enabled verifies the floppy type on boot.  
Boot Device Priority  
Hard Drive  
Selects the Boot Device Priority submenu.  
Selects the Hard Drive submenu.  
Removable  
Devices  
Selects the Removable Devices submenu.  
Removable Format  
Selects the Removable Format submenu.  
Maximum Number  
of I20 Drives  
1
4
Selects the maximum number of I20 drives that will be  
assigned a DOS drive.  
Message Timeout  
Multiplier  
1
2
All I20 message timeout values are multiplied by this  
number.  
4
8
10  
50  
100  
1000  
Pause During  
POST  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Use this to start the IRTOS (I20 Real-time Operating  
System) manually. When POST has stopped, it  
issues three beeps. Press any key to continue  
POST.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exit Menu  
The following menu options are available on the Server menu. Select an option by using the Up or  
Down arrow keys. Then press <Enter> to execute the option, and follow the prompts.  
Option  
Description  
Exit Saving Changes  
Exit Discarding Changes  
Load Setup Defaults  
Load Custom Defaults  
Save Custom Defaults  
Exit Setup and save changes.  
Exit Setup without saving changes.  
Load default values for all Setup items.  
Load settings from Custom Defaults.  
Save changes as Custom Defaults. If CMOS fails, BIOS uses Custom  
Defaults if available. If not, it uses the factory defaults.  
Discard Changes  
Save Changes  
Load previous values of all Setup items.  
Save all changes.  
50  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the System Setup Utility (SSU)  
The SSU is on the configuration software CD-ROM shipped with the server. The SSU provides a  
graphical user interface (GUI) over an extensible framework for server configuration. The  
SSU framework supports the following functions and capabilities:  
Assigns resources to devices and add-in boards before loading the OS.  
Lets you specify boot device order and system security options.  
Permits viewing and clearing of the system event log (SEL).  
Permits viewing of the system field replaceable units (FRUs) and sensor data records (SDRs).  
Allows troubleshooting of the server when the OS is not operational.  
Provides a system-level view of the server I/O devices.  
Supports saving and restoring system configuration.  
When to Run the SSU  
The SSU is a DOS-based utility that supports extended system configuration operations for  
onboard resources and add-in boards. You can also view the SEL and set system boot and security  
options. Use the SSU when you need to:  
Add and remove boards affecting the assignment of resources (ports, memory, IRQs, DMA).  
Modify the server’s boot device order or security settings.  
Change the server configuration settings.  
Save the server configuration.  
View or clear the SEL.  
View FRU information.  
View the SDR table.  
The SSU is PCI-aware and works with any compliant configuration (.CFG) files supplied by the  
peripheral device manufacturer.  
The I/O carrier comes with a .CFG file describing the characteristics of the carrier and the system  
resources it requires.  
To specify a system configuration, SSU uses the information provided by:  
.CFG files.  
Configuration registers.  
Flash memory.  
The information that you enter.  
The SSU then writes the configuration information to flash memory.  
The SSU stores configuration values in flash memory. These values take effect when you boot the  
server. POST checks the values against the actual hardware configuration; if the values do not  
agree, POST generates an error message. You must then run the SSU to specify the correct  
configuration before the server boots.  
The SSU always includes a checksum with the configuration data so BIOS can detect any potential  
data corruption before the actual hardware configuration occurs.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What You Need to Do  
You can run the SSU directly from the configuration software CD-ROM after you have installed a  
CD-ROM drive, or from a set of DOS diskettes.  
If you choose to run the SSU from DOS diskettes, you must copy the SSU from the CD-ROM to  
the diskettes and follow the instructions in the included README.TXT file to prepare the  
diskettes.  
If your diskette drive is disabled or improperly configured, you must use the flash-resident Setup  
utility to enable it so you can use the SSU. If necessary, you can disable the drive after exiting the  
SSU. Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup.  
Running the SSU  
Running the SSU Locally  
Running the ssu.bat file provided on the SSU media starts the SSU. If the server boots directly  
from the SSU media, the ssu.bat file runs automatically. If the server boots from different media,  
the SSU can be started manually or by another application. When the utility starts in the local  
execution mode (the default mode), the SSU accepts input from the keyboard and/or mouse. The  
SSU presents a VGA-based GUI on the primary monitor.  
The SSU runs from writable, nonwritable, removable, and nonremovable media. If the SSU is run  
from nonwritable media, user preference settings (like screen colors) cannot be saved.  
The SSU supports the ROM-DOS V6.22 OS. It can run on other ROM-DOS compatible OSs, but  
they are not supported. The SSU will not operate from a “DOS window” running under an OS like  
Windows.  
Running the SSU Remotely  
To run the SSU remotely, you must use one of two mechanisms:  
Graphical hardware redirection through the Intel remote management card (IRMC)  
BIOS console redirection  
NOTE  
The SSU supports a text mode of operation versus the default VGA graphics  
mode. Some forms of remote operation require that the SSU be operated in  
text mode. In text mode, the SSU screens are constructed using only  
character-based graphics and colors. The primary benefit of text mode is the  
reduced amount of display information that needs to be communicated to a  
remote console. Support for text mode operation also allows the SSU to be  
operated remotely via modem using existing technologies, with no  
modification to the SSU required.  
To start the SSU in text mode, type “AF/t” from the command line in the  
SSU subdirectory (the directory containing the af.exe file). Depending on  
the mode of execution, this could involve exiting the SSU to reach the  
command prompt, then restarting the SSU in text mode.  
52  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphical Hardware Redirection through the Intel Remote Management Card (IRMC)  
Using graphical hardware redirection through the IRMC, you can:  
See the SSU console in VGA graphics mode.  
Control the mouse.  
Control the keyboard from a local system connected to a remote server by a network or  
modem.  
The IRMC provides video memory, keyboard, and mouse redirection support. Video memory and  
user input is sent to a remote location through either a modem or Ethernet link and displayed by  
the remote control console. This solution requires an IRMC board installed in the remote server  
and the remote control software available on the local system. In this model of remote operation,  
the SSU executes exclusively on the remote server. Any files required for the SSU to execute must  
be on the remote server (on removable or nonremovable media). Downloading the SSU to a  
remote server is not explicitly supported by the SSU, but using a third-party software package to  
download the required SSU files to the remote server is not prohibited.  
BIOS Console Redirection  
Using BIOS console redirection, you can:  
See the SSU console.  
Control the keyboard from a local system connected to a remote server by a modem or direct  
serial connection.  
The local system must run terminal emulator software capable of supporting ANSI terminal  
sequences. BIOS console redirection provides text mode video and keyboard redirection support  
only. It does not support redirection of the mouse.  
Text mode video and user input is sent to a remote location through either a modem or direct serial  
link and is displayed by the terminal emulator software on the local system.  
In this model of remote operation, the SSU executes in text mode exclusively on the remote server.  
Any files required for the SSU to execute must be on the remote server (on removable or  
nonremovable media).  
Direct Platform Control (DPC) Console  
Using the DPC console in conjunction with BIOS console redirection, you can:  
See the BIOS Setup Screen (F2)  
Control the keyboard from a local system connected to a remote server by a modem or direct  
serial connection  
The local system must be running the DPC console software. This method of redirection provides  
text mode video and keyboard redirection support only. It does not support redirection of the  
mouse.  
For specific instructions on implementing the DPC console, see "Direct Platform Control (DPC)  
Console" on page 63.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the SSU  
The SSU is a collection of task-oriented modules plugged into a common framework called the  
Application Framework (AF). The AF provides a launching point for individual tasks and a  
location for setting customization information.  
1. Turn on your video monitor and your system.  
2. Start the SSU through one of two ways:  
After creating a set of SSU diskettes from the CD-ROM: Insert the first SSU diskette  
in drive A. Press the reset button or <Ctrl+Alt+Del> to reboot your server from the  
diskette.  
Directly from the Server Configuration Software CD-ROM: Insert the configuration  
software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. Press the reset button or <Ctrl-Alt-Del> to  
reboot. When prompted to do so, press <F2> to enter BIOS Setup. From the Boot Menu,  
select the Boot Device Priority option. Select CD-ROM as your primary boot device.  
Save those settings and exit BIOS Setup. The server will boot from the CD-ROM and  
display a menu of options. Follow the instructions in the menu to start the SSU.  
3. When the SSU title appears on the screen, press <Enter> to continue.  
4. The mouse driver loads if it is available; press <Enter> to continue.  
This message appears:  
Please wait while the Application Framework loads....  
When the main window of the SSU appears, you can customize the GUI before continuing.  
See “Customizing the SSU” on page 55.  
Figure 5. SSU Main Window  
54  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customizing the SSU  
You can customize the GUI according to your preferences. The AF sets these preferences and  
saves them in the AF.INI file so that they take effect the next time you start the SSU. Use these six  
user-customizable settings:  
BackColor—(default = 3) lets you change the BACKGROUND color associated with  
different items on the screen to predefined color combinations. The changes are instantaneous.  
Color—(default = 0) lets you change the WINDOW color preference selection to predefined  
color combinations. The changes are instantaneous.  
UserMode—(default = expert) lets you set the desired expertise level.  
Novice  
Intermediate  
Expert  
The expertise level determines which tasks are visible in the Available Tasks section and what  
actions each task performs. For a new mode setting to take effect, you must exit the SSU and  
restart it. In the current implementation, there is no distinction between these three different  
modes.  
Language—(default = EN) lets you change the text displayed in the SSU to the appropriate  
language. For a new language setting to take effect, you must exit the SSU and restart it. For  
a list of Alpha-2 language codes, see the ISO 639:1988 and ISO 3166-1993 specifications.  
Locale—(default = US) lets you change the current locale used in the SSU environment. For a  
new locale to take effect, you must exit the SSU and restart it. For a list of Alpha-2 locale  
codes, see the ISO 639:1988 and ISO 3166-1993 specifications.  
Other—lets you change other miscellaneous options in the SSU. The changes are immediate.  
To change the interface default values:  
Use the mouse to click the proper button in the Preferences section of the SSU Main window.  
OR  
Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the desired button, and press the spacebar or <Enter>.  
OR  
Access the menu bar with the mouse or hot keys (Alt + underlined letter).  
NOTE  
If you run the SSU from nonwritable media (like a CD-ROM), these  
preferences will be lost when you exit the SSU.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Launching a Task  
It is possible to have many tasks open at the same time, although some tasks might require  
complete control to avoid possible conflicts. A task achieves complete control by commanding the  
center of operation until you close the task window.  
To launch a task:  
In the SSU Main window, double-click the task name under Available Tasks to display the  
main window for that task, OR  
Highlight the task name, and click <OK>, OR  
Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the desired button, and press the spacebar or <Enter>.  
Resource Configuration Add-In (RCA) Window  
The RCA provides three major functions:  
Creates representations of devices that cannot be discovered by the system.  
Modifies the contents of the system by adding and removing devices.  
Modifies the resources used by devices.  
1. From the SSU main window, launch the RCA by selecting the “Resources” task under the  
RCA heading in the task box.  
2. When the RCA window appears, it displays messages similar to the following:  
Baseboard: System Board  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 00 -– Host Processor Bridge  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 0D –- Multifunction Controller  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 0F –- Ethernet Controller  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 12 –- Multifunction Controller  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 14 –- VGA Controller  
3. To configure a device, click it or select its name in the Devices section of the RCA window,  
and press the spacebar or <Enter>.  
4. You can close the RCA window and return to the AF by clicking on the Close button. Any  
changes made will be kept in memory for use by the RCA when it is rerun.  
5. Save all changes by clicking <Save>. Saving writes your current configuration to nonvolatile  
storage where it will be available to the system after every reboot.  
6. To discard all changes, close the window by clicking on the system menu (the dash in the  
upper-left corner). Do not do this if you want to save changes (step 5).  
Modifying Resources  
You might need to modify the resources of a device to accommodate certain OSs, applications, and  
drivers. You might also need to modify resources to resolve a conflict.  
To modify the resources associated with a device:  
1. Highlight the device in the Devices section of the RCA window.  
2. Press the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click the entry.  
This displays the functions of the selected device along with possible choices and the resources  
associated with those choices.  
56  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make a modification:  
1. Highlight the function in the Configuration window.  
2. Press the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click the entry (this updates the choice and resource  
lists).  
3. Press the tab key to get to the choice list, and press <Enter>.  
4. Use the arrow keys to select a proper choice, and press <Enter> again.  
5. If the choice allows multiple possible values for a particular resource, use the hot key to select  
a resource and press the spacebar or double-click the resource.  
6. Select the desired resource, and click <OK>.  
System Resource Usage  
Click <Resource Use> in the Configuration window to display the System Resource Usage  
window, which shows the resources each device consumes. This information is useful if a conflict  
occurs. Devices can be organized according to the resources you want to examine using the  
options in the Resource section of the screen. The resource information can also be written to a  
plain text file through this window.  
Multiboot Options Add-In  
In this window, you can change the boot priority of a device.  
1. Select a device.  
2. Press <+> to move the device up in the list (higher priority). Press <-> to move it down.  
Security Add-In  
In this window, you can set the user and administrator passwords and security options.  
To Set the User Password  
1. Click <User Password>.  
2. Enter the password in the first field.  
3. Confirm the password by entering it again in the second field.  
To Change or Clear the User Password  
1. Click <User Password>.  
2. Enter the old password in the first field.  
3. Enter the new password in the second field (or leave blank to clear).  
4. Confirm the password by entering it again in the second field (or leave blank to clear).  
To Set the Administrator Password  
1. Click <Administrator Password>.  
2. Enter the password in the first field.  
3. Confirm the password by entering it again in the second field.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Change or Clear the Administrator Password  
1. Click <Administrator Password>.  
2. Enter the old password in the first field.  
3. Enter the new password in the second field (or leave blank to clear).  
4. Confirm the password by entering it again in the second field (or leave blank to clear).  
Security Options  
The security options available to you depend on your platform. The list below is representative.  
Click <Options> to set the security options:  
Hot Key—sets a key sequence that puts the server into secure mode when the key is pressed.  
Lock-Out Timer—sets an interval that puts the server into secure mode when no activity  
occurs during the interval.  
Secure Boot Mode—forces the server to boot directly into secure mode.  
Video Blanking—turns off the video when the server is in secure mode.  
Floppy Write—controls access to the diskette drive when the server is in secure mode.  
Front Panel Lockout—control the power and reset button while the server is in secure mode.  
System Event Log (SEL) Viewer Add-In  
Clicking on the SEL add-in task brings up the SEL viewer add-in, which allows you to:  
Examine SEL records via the baseboard management controller (BMC) in hex or verbose  
mode.  
Examine SEL records by sensor or event type in hex or verbose mode.  
Examine SEL records from a previously stored binary file in hex or verbose mode.  
Save SEL records to a file in either text or binary form.  
Clear SEL entries from the nonvolatile storage area.  
The SEL viewer main window provides access to features of the add-in. Each option included on  
the main menu supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by an underlined letter  
in the text listing the option. The main window includes support to display the following  
information for each SEL entry:  
Record identifier  
Event type  
Time stamp information  
Generator identifier  
Emv revision  
Sensor type  
Sensor number  
Event description  
58  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 6 shows the SEL viewer main window. Table 7 lists the window’s menus and options.  
Figure 6. SEL Viewer Add-in Main Window  
Table 7.  
Menu  
File  
SEL Viewer Menus  
Options  
Open SEL: Views data from previously saved SEL file.  
Save SEL: Saves the currently loaded SEL data to a file.  
Clear SEL: Clears the SEL data from the BMC.  
Exit: Quits the SEL Viewer.  
View  
SEL Info: Displays information about the SEL (display only).  
All Events: Displays the current SEL data from the BMC.  
By Sensor: Displays a pop-up menu allowing you to view the data from a certain sensor type.  
By Event: Displays a pop-up menu allowing you to view the data from a certain event type.  
Monitor Real-time: Displays SEL information in real time, allowing you to continuously monitor  
the SEL (events are displayed as soon as they are posted to the SEL).  
Settings Display Hex/Verbose: Toggles between hex/interpreted mode of displaying the SEL records.  
Output Text/Binary: Determines whether SEL data will be saved to the file (and under File\Save)  
in binary format or verbose format.  
Help  
About: Displays the SEL Viewer version information.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sensor Data Record (SDR) Manager Add-In  
The SDR Manager can display SDR records in either raw form (hexadecimal) or in an interpreted,  
easy-to-understand textual form (verbose).  
In this window, you can:  
Examine all SDR records through the baseboard management controller (BMC) in either hex  
or verbose mode.  
Examine SDR records by Record type in either hex or verbose mode.  
Examine SDR records from a previously stored binary file in either hex or verbose mode.  
Save the SDR records to a file in either text or binary form.  
The SDR Manager main window provides access to features of the add-in through menus. Each  
option included on the main menu supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by  
an underlined letter in the text listing the option.  
Figure 7 shows the SDR Manager main window. Table 8 lists the window’s menus and options.  
Figure 7. SDR Manager Main Window  
60  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 8.  
Menu  
File  
SDR Manager Menus  
Options  
Open FRU: Opens FRU data from a previously saved file.  
Save SDR: Saves SDR data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format.  
Exit: Quits the SDR Manager.  
View  
SDR Info: Displays SDR information as returned by the GetSDRInfo interface of the BMC.  
All Records: Displays all records in the SDR repository.  
By Record: Displays all records in the SDR repository, sorted by record type.  
Settings Display Hex: Displays SDR records in hex format.  
Display Verbose: Displays SDR records in verbose format.  
Output Text: Saves SDR data in verbose format.  
Output Binary: Saves SDR data in binary format.  
Help  
About: Displays SDR Manager version information.  
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Manager Add-In  
The FRU Manager can display the FRU inventory areas in either hex or verbose format.  
In this window you can:  
Examine all FRU inventory areas on the server in either hex or verbose mode.  
Examine individual FRU inventory areas in either hex or verbose mode.  
Examine FRU inventory of the BMC only in either hex or verbose mode.  
Save the FRU inventory areas to a file in either text or binary form for the BMC only.  
The FRU manager’s main window provides access to features of the add-in through menus. Each  
option included on the main menu supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by  
an underlined letter in the text listing the option.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 8 shows the FRU Manager main window. Table 9 lists the window’s menus and options.  
Figure 8. FRU Manager Main Window  
Table 9.  
Menu  
File  
FRU Manager Menus  
Options  
Open FRU: Opens FRU data from a previously saved file.  
Save FRU: Saves FRU data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format.  
Exit: Quits the FRU Manager.  
View  
FRU Info: Displays FRU information of the selected device.  
All FRU Areas: Displays FRU areas of all devices.  
By Device Type: Displays FRU areas sorted by device type.  
Settings Display Hex: Displays FRU areas in hex format.  
Display Verbose: Displays FRU areas in verbose format.  
Output Text: Saves FRU data in verbose format.  
Output Binary: Saves FRU data in binary format.  
Help  
About: Displays FRU Manager version information.  
62  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exiting the SSU  
Exiting the SSU causes all windows to close.  
1. Exit the SSU by opening the menu bar item File in the SSU Main window.  
2. Click <Exit>.  
Or  
Highlight Exit, and press <Enter>.  
Direct Platform Control (DPC) Console  
The DPC console provides an interface, called the console manager, to the EMP on the server.  
This interface allows remote server management via a modem or direct connection.  
The following server control operations are available with the console manager:  
Connecting to remote servers.  
Powering the server on or off.  
Resetting the server.  
Switching the server console between EMP active and BIOS redirect modes.  
The console manager uses three management plug-ins to monitor the server: the SEL, SDR, and  
FRU viewers. The console manager also has a support plug-in phonebook, which you can use to  
create and maintain a list of servers and their phone numbers. You can launch the Connect dialog  
directly from the Phonebook dialog to connect to a selected server.  
How the DPC Console Works  
The EMP shares the COM2 port with the system. When the EMP has control of the port, the port  
operates in command state. When the system has control of it, the port operates in redirect state.  
When connecting to a server, the DPC console checks to determine the current COM2 port state.  
Command state—the default COM2 state. In this state, the DPC console communicates with  
the servers firmware, allowing the client to remotely reset or power the server up or down.  
The client can also view the servers SEL, FRU information, or SDR table.  
Redirect state—the DPC console serves as a PC ANSI terminal window for BIOS console  
redirection. Commands typed in this window are transmitted through BIOS to the servers  
console, and text displayed on the server console is displayed on the DPC consoles terminal  
window. With the EMP in this state, you can remotely view boot messages, access BIOS  
setup, and run DOS text mode applications through the DPC consoles terminal window.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9. DPC Console in Command State  
Figure 10. DPC Console in Redirect State  
Figure 10 shows the DPC console window in redirect state with the terminal window. The text  
appearing on the server monitor displays in the redirect window.  
64  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Availability of DPC console features is determined by the following:  
The EMP access mode selected during configuration in the System Management Submenu of  
the BIOS Server Menu, and  
Whether the servers COM2 port is configured for console redirect in BIOS.  
The three EMP access modes are disabled, preboot, and always active.  
Table 10. DPC Console Access Modes (server configured for console redirect)  
Mode  
Server is powered off  
During POST  
After OS boots  
Disabled  
Preboot  
Redirect window appears but is blank.  
EMP commands available.  
Redirect window.  
Redirect window.*  
Redirect window.*  
Redirect window.  
Redirect window.  
Always Active EMP commands available.  
EMP commands available.  
*
You can modify the operation mode by selections in the POST reset and POST power-up dialogs. These are server  
control dialogs available with the DPC Console.  
Table 11. DPC Console Access Modes (server NOT configured for console redirect)  
Mode  
Server is powered off  
During POST  
After OS boots  
Disabled  
Redirect window appears but is  
blank.  
Redirect window  
appears, but is blank.  
Redirect window appears  
but is blank.  
Preboot  
EMP commands available.  
EMP commands  
available.  
Redirect window appears  
but is blank.  
Always Active EMP commands available.  
EMP commands  
available.  
EMP commands  
available.  
DPC Console Requirements  
This section outlines the requirements and configurations necessary for using the DPC console.  
Operating Systems:  
Windows 98 or later  
16 MB of RAM, 32 MB recommended  
20 MB disk space  
Windows NT  
Windows NT 4.0 or later  
24 MB of RAM, 32 MB recommended  
20 MB disk space  
Client Configuration: The DPC console will support all COM ports on the client system, along  
with any Windows NT/95-compatible modem.  
Server Configuration: The DPC console requires that the servers COM2 port be connected to an  
external modem or directly connected to a serial cable.  
Direct Connect Configuration: A null modem serial cable is needed. Connect one end of the  
cable into the COM2 port of the server and the other into a port on the client machine.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modem Configuration: On the client, the DPC console uses the Windows application program  
interface (API) to determine if a modem is connected and available. The DPC Console does not  
configure the modem; it should be preconfigured through Windows.  
For modem support, the server must use a Hayes-compatible 14400 bps modem. The modem must  
be on the NT hardware compatibility list provided by Microsoft. The server modem must be set in  
autoanswer mode for the DPC console to be able to connect to it.  
Setting Up the Server for the EMP  
To use the EMP, you must configure BIOS with specific settings. Enter these settings into the  
BIOS Server Menu and the Console Redirection Submenu. These sections show ALL available  
options for BIOS settings.  
The two sections on page 66, “Server Menu” and “Console Redirection Submenu,” describe the  
settings that MUST be configured to use the EMP.  
Server Menu  
All EMP-related settings occur from the Server Menu. Change only the items below; all other  
default settings should remain the same.  
EMP Password: Any time you attempt to initiate a connection, a prompt for the user password  
appears. If you never set up the EMP password, anyone can access the EMP by clicking <OK>  
through the password prompt.  
In the EMP password area, type in a password of up to eight alphanumeric characters. If the  
system beeps, the password was not accepted; you must enter a different password.  
EMP Access Modes: Choose either disabled, preboot, or always active, depending on the type of  
EMP access needed. Tables 10 and 11 (page 65) list what is available with a given setting.  
EMP Restricted Mode Access: Set restricted mode to either enabled or disabled. In enabled  
mode, the DPC console's server control options, Power On/Off and Reset, are NOT available. In  
disabled mode, these options ARE available.  
EMP Direct Connect/Modem Mode: Select Direct Connect if a null modem serial cable directly  
connects the server's COM2 port to the DPC console client machine. If they are connected via a  
modem, select Modem Mode.  
Console Redirection Submenu  
To use the EMP, you must set the following options exactly as noted.  
COM Port Address: Select 2F8. This is the COM2 port that the EMP must use. The  
IRQ# setting is automatically assigned with the correct number based on the COM port address  
choice.  
Baud Rate: Select 19.2K.  
Console Type: Select PC ANSI.  
Flow Control: Select CTS/RTS + CD.  
66  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main DPC Console Window  
The main DPC console window provides a graphical user interface (GUI) to access server control  
operations and to launch the management plug-ins. A menu and tool bar at the top of the GUI  
provide options to initiate plug-ins and other support features. A status bar at the bottom displays  
connection information like server name, line status, and mode.  
Toolbar  
The toolbar buttons combine server control and management plug-in options available from the  
Connect and Action Menus.  
Connects to a selected server.  
Disconnects from the currently connected server.  
Powers the selected server on or off.  
Resets the selected server.  
Opens the SEL viewer.  
Opens the SDR viewer.  
Opens the FRU viewer.  
Opens the phonebook.  
Opens online help.  
Status Bar  
The status bar displays at the bottom of the current window. It contains the following status  
information:  
Server Name: Lists the name of the connected server.  
Line: Lists the type of line connection direct or modem.  
Mode: Lists mode either redirect or EMP, depending on whether the EMP has control of the  
COM2 port.  
Line Status: Gives status information on the server connection. For example, if a server is  
connected, the status bar says “Connected.” Otherwise, the line is blank.  
DPC Console Main Menu  
File  
Exit: Exits the DPC console.  
Connect  
Disconnect: Disconnects the server connection.  
[Re]Connect: Raises the connect dialog.  
(A list of the five most recent connections): Initiates connection to selected server.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Action  
Power On/Off: Powers the server on or off with post-power-up options.  
Reset: Resets the server with post-reset options.  
FPC FRU Viewer: Opens the FPC FRU viewer.  
Phonebook: Opens the phonebook dialog.  
Help: Provides version information and help topics for the DPC console.  
Server Control Operations  
Three server control operations are available from the menu or toolbar of the main DPC console  
window: Connecting to a remote server, powering the server on and off remotely, and resetting the  
server. The server console mode can also be switched between EMP active and BIOS redirect  
modes through post-power-up and post-reset options.  
Connecting to Remote Server  
Select [Re]Connect from the Connect Menu and follow the Connect dialog shown in Figure 11.  
Connect Dialog. This allows you to connect to a selected server. If the client machine is already  
connected to a server, initiating connection generates a warning message. The message states that  
the existing connection will be terminated if you continue trying to initiate the new connection.  
You are prompted to enter the EMP password whenever a connection is attempted.  
Figure 11. Connect Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
Line Selection:  
Dial-up: Connects to the selected server with a dial-up modem.  
Direct connect (Serial Line): Connects to the selected server directly using a null modem  
serial cable.  
Server: Displays a list of available servers in a dropdown edit list box. You can select or  
enter a server name; when the line selection is dial-up, you must select a server.  
68  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Serial Line: When the line selection is set to direct connect (serial line), you must specify the  
following.  
Baud Rate: Specifies baud rate; must be 19200 for DPC to connect properly.  
COM Port No.: Sets the COM port number to which the null modem serial cable is  
connected.  
Connect: Initiates connection to the server. When you click this button, you are prompted for  
the EMP password.  
Config: Displays the Phonebook dialog.  
Cancel: Exit the Connect dialog with no action taken.  
Help: Display dialog-level help information.  
Powering the Server On/Off Remotely  
Select Power On/Off from the Action Menu to power the server on or off, with post-power-up  
options. This option generates the Power on/off dialog.  
Figure 12. Power On/Off Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
Power ON: Powers on the server.  
Power OFF: Powers off the server. This option is not allowed if the server is configured in  
restricted mode for EMP operations.  
Post-power-up option: Sets the server mode to EMP active or BIOS redirection. The setting  
is effective at the next power-up. The default selection is EMP active.  
Cancel: Exits the dialog with no action taken.  
Help: Displays dialog-level help information.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resetting the Server Remotely  
Select Reset from the Action Menu to generate the Reset dialog so that you can remotely reset the  
server with post-reset options.  
Figure 13. Reset Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
System Reset: Resets the server with the selected post-reset options. This operation is not  
allowed if the server is configured in restricted mode for EMP operations.  
Option Group: Sets the post-reset option that will be effective after reset. The options are  
EMP active or BIOS redirection. The default selection is EMP active.  
Cancel: Exits the dialog with no action taken.  
Help: Displays dialog-level help information.  
70  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phonebook  
The DPC console provides a phonebook, a support plug-in that stores names and numbers of  
servers in a list that can be updated by adding, modifying, or deleting entries. You can open the  
phonebook from the Main Menu and tool bars, or launch it by clicking the Config button.  
Figure 14. Phonebook Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
Server: Displays a dropdown list of server names previously stored in the phonebook. To  
clear the server field, select New.  
Phone No.: Displays the number of the selected server. To clear the Phone No. field, select  
New.  
Operation:  
New: Makes a new entry in the phonebook. Selecting this option clears the Server and  
Phone No. fields. You must click <Save> to add the entry to the phonebook.  
Modify: Edits an existing entry. First select an existing entry from the Server dropdown  
edit box and modify the existing phone number. Click <Save> to store this entry.  
Delete: Deletes an entry from the phonebook. You must first select an existing server  
from the Server dropdown edit box. Click <Save> to delete the entry.  
Save: Saves a new or modified phonebook entry or deletes an entry if you have already  
selected the Delete radio button.  
Connect: Opens the Connect dialog with the server whose name appears in the phonebooks  
Server dropdown edit box.  
Cancel: Exits the dialog with no action taken.  
Help: Displays dialog-level help information.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management Plug-Ins  
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Viewer  
The FRU viewer lets you view data from the servers FRU information area. Options available  
with the FRU viewer are:  
View all FRU records.  
View FRU summary information.  
Set FRU display mode to either hex or verbose mode.  
Close the FRU viewer.  
Exit the DPC console.  
FRU Viewer Menu Options  
The following menu options are on the FRU viewer menu bar:  
File:  
Close: Closes the FRU viewer.  
Exit: Exits the DPC console.  
View:  
Display all Records: Displays all FRU data, which consist of chassis, board, and product  
information.  
FRU Info: Displays the FRU summary information.  
Settings: Lets you change operating parameters for the FRU viewer. This menu displays the  
following suboption:  
Display Hex/Verbose: Toggles between hex mode and interpreted mode of displaying  
FRU records.  
Window: Gives options for displaying currently open windows.  
Help: Provides version information for the FRU viewer and provides help topics on the  
DPC console.  
FRU and SDR Load Utility  
The Field Replacement Unit (FRU) and Sensor Data Record (SDR) load utility is a DOS-based  
program that updates the server management subsystem’s product level FRU, SDR, and the  
Desktop Management Interface (DMI) nonvolatile storage components (EEPROMs). The utility:  
Discovers the product configuration based on instructions in a master configuration file.  
Displays the FRU information.  
Updates the EEPROM associated with the baseboard management controller (BMC) that holds  
the SDR and FRU area.  
Updates the DMI FRU area located in the BIOS nonvolatile storage device.  
Generically handles FRU devices that might not be associated with the BMC.  
72  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility  
You should run the FRUSDR load utility each time you upgrade or replace the hardware in your  
server, excluding add-in boards, hard drives, and RAM.  
Because the utility must be reloaded to properly initialize the sensors after programming, turn the  
server off and remove the AC power cords from the server. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then  
reconnect the power cords and turn on the server.  
What You Need to Do  
You can run the utility directly from the configuration software CD-ROM or from diskettes you  
create from the CD-ROM.  
If you choose to run the FRUSDR Load Utility from a diskette, you must copy the utility from the  
CD-ROM and follow the instructions in the included README.TXT file.  
If your diskette drive is disabled, or improperly configured, you must use BIOS Setup to enable it.  
If necessary, you can disable the drive after you have finished using the FRUSDR utility.  
How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility  
The utility:  
Is compatible with ROM-DOS Ver. 6.22, MS-DOS Ver. 6.22, and later versions.  
Accepts CFG, SDR, and FRU load files (the executable file for the utility is frusdr.exe).  
Requires the following supporting files:  
One or more .fru files describing the system’s FRUs  
A .cfg file describing the system configuration  
An .sdr file describing the sensors in the system  
Command Line Format  
The basic command line format is  
frusdr [-?] [-h] [-d {dmi, fru, sdr}] [-cfg filename.cfg] [-fru filename.fru]  
Table 12. Command Line Format  
Command  
Frusdr  
Description  
Is the name of the utility.  
Displays usage information.  
Displays requested area only.  
Uses custom CFG file.  
Pause between blocks of data.  
-? or –h  
-d {dmi, fru, sdr}  
-cfg filename.cfg  
-p  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parsing the Command Line  
The FRUSDR load utility allows only one command line function at a time. A command line  
function can consist of two parameters. Example: -cfg filename.cfg. Invalid parameters generate  
an error message and cause the program to end. You can use either a slash (/) or a minus sign (-)  
to specify command line options. The -p flag can be used in conjunction with any of the other  
options.  
Displaying Usage Information  
When the utility is run with the -? or -h command line flags, the following message is displayed  
when the verbose flag -v is added to the help command:  
FRU & SDR Load Utility Version 2.1 Revision R.1.1  
Usage:  
Frusdr  
-? or –h  
-d {dmi,fru,sdr}  
-cfg filename.cfg  
Displays usage information.  
Only displays requested area.  
Uses custom CFG file.  
-p  
-v  
Pause between blocks of data.  
Verbose, display any additional details.  
Copyright (c) 1998, Intel Corporation, All Rights Reserved  
This utility must be run from a system executing DOS. Running in a Window's  
DOSbox is insufficient and will provide incorrect results. Programming the  
BMCFRU area clears the SDR table; therefore the SDR table must be reprogrammed.  
Upon completing the programming of the FRU and SDR areas, the server should be  
rebooted.  
Note: DOS users may alternatively use a '/' instead of the '-'.  
The following information displays if the -v option is included in the command line.  
The /D FRU command may be followed with up to 16 device addresses. These device  
addresses are used to view up to 16 different FRU areas, instead of the default  
of displaying the BMC FRU. The arguments following the "-d FRU" are in the same  
order and value as the NVS_TYPE, NVS_LUN, DEV_CONTROLLER, DEV_BUS and DEV_ADDRESS  
which are found in the FRU file header in each FRU file. The LUN address and  
device controller are optional. If the LUN address is used, it must start with  
an 'L'. If the device controller is used, it must start with a ‘C’ and all other  
parameters must be present.  
Usage: FRUSDR -d fru (device) [devctrl] [lun] (bus) (addr) (addr2) (etc)  
Example: FRUSDR /D FRU IMBDEVICE C22 L00 00 C0 C2  
The configuration file can be used to load multiple FRU and SDR files. In the configuration file,  
you can define which FRU and SDR areas are to be programmed. Additionally, you can request  
information from the user or ask the user to choose which areas to program.  
74  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying a Given Area  
When the utility is run with the -d DMI, -d FRU, or -d SDR command line flag, the indicated area  
is displayed. Each area represents one sensor for each instrumented device in the server. If the  
given display function fails because of an inability to parse the data present or a hardware failure,  
the utility displays an error message and exits.  
Displaying DMI Area  
Each DMI area displayed is headed with the DMI area designated name. In each area, each field  
has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number.  
Example:  
To display the DMI area, type frusdr -d dmi and press <Enter>.  
Displaying FRU Area  
The FRU area is displayed in ASCII format when the field is ASCII or as a number when the field  
is a number. Each FRU area displayed is headed with the FRU area designated name. Each field  
has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number. The board, chassis, and  
product FRU areas end with an END OF FIELDS CODE that indicates there are no more data in  
the area. The internal use area is displayed in hex format, 16 bytes per line.  
Example:  
To display the FRU area, type frusdr -d fru and press <Enter>.  
Displaying SDR Area  
The SDR nonvolatile storage area is displayed in the following hex format. The data are separated  
by a sensor record number X header, where X is the number of that sensor record in the SDR area.  
The next line after the header is the sensor record data in hex format delineated by spaces. Each  
line holds up to 16 bytes. The data on each line are followed by the same data in ASCII format;  
nonprintable characters (ch < 32 || ch > 126) are substituted by a period (.).  
Example:  
To display the SDR area, type frusdr -d sdr and press <Enter>.  
Using Specified CFG File  
The utility can be run with the command line parameter of -cfg filename.cfg. The filename can be  
any DOS-accepted, eight-character filename string. The utility loads the specified CFG file and  
uses the entries in that file to probe the hardware and to select the proper SDRs to load into  
nonvolatile storage.  
Displaying Utility Title and Version  
The utility displays its title:  
FRU & SDR Load Utility, Version X.X, Revision X.XX where X.XX is the revision number for  
the utility.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration File  
The configuration file is in ASCII text. The utility executes commands formed by the strings  
present in the configuration file. These commands cause the utility to run tasks needed to load the  
proper SDRs into the nonvolatile storage of the BMC and possibly generic FRU devices. Some of  
the commands may be interactive and require you to make a choice.  
Prompting for Product Level FRU Information  
Through the use of a configuration file, the utility might prompt you for FRU information.  
Filtering Records From the SDR File  
The MASTER.SDR file has all the possible SDRs for the system. These records will probably  
need to be filtered based on the current product configuration. The configuration file directs the  
filtering of the SDRs.  
Updating the SDR Nonvolatile Storage Area  
After the utility validates the header area of the supplied SDR file, it updates the SDR repository  
area. Before programming, the utility clears the SDR repository area. The utility filters all tagged  
SDRs depending on the product configuration set in the configuration file. Nontagged SDRs are  
automatically programmed. The utility also copies all written SDRs to the SDR.TMP file; it  
contains an image of what was loaded. The TMP file is also useful for debugging the server.  
Updating FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area  
After the configuration is determined, the utility updates the FRU nonvolatile storage area. First it  
verifies the common header area and checksum from the specified FRU file. The internal use area  
is read out of the specified .FRU file and is programmed into the nonvolatile storage. The chassis  
area is read out of the specified .FRU file. Finally, it reads the product area out of the specified  
FRU file, then the area is programmed into the FRU nonvolatile storage. All areas are also written  
to the FRU.TMP file.  
Updating DMI FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area  
After programming the BMC FRU area, the utility programs chassis, board, and product  
FRU information to the DMI fields, if the DMI flag follows each FRUAREA command in the  
configuration file.  
Cleaning Up and Exiting  
If an update was successfully performed, the utility displays a single message and then exits.  
If the utility fails, it immediately exits with an error message and exit code.  
76  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading BIOS  
Preparing for the Upgrade  
Before you upgrade BIOS, record the current BIOS settings, obtain the upgrade utility, and make a  
copy of the current BIOS.  
Recording the Current BIOS Settings  
1. Boot the computer and press <F2> when you see the message:  
Press <F2> Key if you want to run SETUP  
2. Write down the current settings in the BIOS Setup program.  
NOTE  
Do not skip step 2. You will need these settings to configure your computer  
at the end of the procedure.  
Obtaining the Upgrade Utility  
You can upgrade to a new version of BIOS using the new BIOS files and the BIOS upgrade utility,  
iFLASH.EXE. You can obtain the BIOS upgrade file and the iFLASH.EXE utility through your  
computer supplier or from the Intel World Wide Web site:  
http://www.intel.com  
NOTE  
Review the instructions distributed with the upgrade utility before  
attempting a BIOS upgrade.  
This upgrade utility lets you:  
Upgrade BIOS in flash memory  
Update the language section of BIOS  
The following steps explain how to upgrade BIOS.  
Creating a Bootable Diskette  
1. Use a DOS or Windows 95 system to create the diskette.  
2. Insert a diskette in drive A.  
3. At the C:\ prompt, for an unformatted diskette, type:  
format a:/s  
or, for a formatted diskette, type:  
sys a:  
4. Press <Enter>.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating the BIOS Upgrade Diskette  
The BIOS upgrade file is a compressed self-extracting archive that contains the files you need to  
upgrade.  
1. Copy the BIOS upgrade file to a temporary directory on your hard disk.  
2. From the C:\ prompt, change to the temporary directory.  
3. To extract the file, type the name of the BIOS upgrade file, for example:  
10006BI1.EXE  
4. Press <Enter>. The extracted file contains the following files:  
LICENSE.TXT  
README.TXT  
BIOS.EXE  
5. Read the LICENSE.TXT file, which contains the software license agreement, and the  
README.TXT file, which contains the instructions for the BIOS upgrade.  
6. Insert the bootable diskette into drive A.  
7. To extract the BIOS.EXE file to the diskette, change to the temporary directory that holds the  
BIOS.EXE file and type:  
BIOS A:  
8. Press <Enter>.  
9. The diskette now holds the BIOS upgrade and recovery files.  
Upgrading BIOS  
1. Boot the computer with the diskette in drive A. The BIOS upgrade utility screen appears.  
2. Select Update Flash Memory From a File.  
3. Select Update System BIOS. Press <Enter>.  
4. Use the arrow keys to select the correct .bio file. Press <Enter>.  
5. When asked toconfirm that you want to flash the new BIOS into memory, select Continue with  
Programming. Press <Enter>.  
6. When the utility displays the message that the upgrade is complete, remove the diskette. Press  
<Enter>.  
7. As the computer boots after the upgrade, check the BIOS identifier (version number) to make  
sure the upgrade was successful.  
8. To enter the Setup program, press <F2> when you see the message:  
Press <F2> Key if you want to run SETUP  
9. For proper operation, load the Setup program defaults. To load the defaults, press <F9>.  
10. To accept the defaults, press <Enter>.  
11. Set the options in the Setup program to the settings you wrote down before the BIOS upgrade.  
12. To save the settings, press <F10>.  
13. To accept the settings, press <Enter>.  
14. Turn off the computer and reboot.  
78  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recovering BIOS  
It is unlikely that anything will interrupt the BIOS upgrade; however, if an interruption occurs,  
BIOS could be damaged. In that case, you must recover BIOS.  
NOTE  
Because of the small amount of code available in the nonerasable boot block  
area, there is no video support. You will not see anything on the screen  
during the procedure. Monitor the procedure by listening to the speaker and  
looking at the diskette drive LED.  
The procedure for recovering BIOS is detailed in “Recovery Boot Switch” on page 184. After  
doing the procedure, leave the upgrade disk in drive A and turn on the server, then continue with  
the BIOS upgrade (see page 78).  
Changing BIOS Language  
You can use the BIOS upgrade utility to change the language that BIOS displays. Use a bootable  
diskette containing the Intel flash utility and language files (see page 78).  
1. Boot the computer with the bootable diskette in drive A. The BIOS upgrade utility screen  
appears.  
2. Select Update Flash Memory from a file.  
3. Select Update Language Set. Press <Enter>.  
4. Select drive A and use the arrow keys to select the correct .lng file. Press <Enter>.  
5. When asked toconfirm that you want to flash the new language into memory, select Continue  
with Programming. Press <Enter>.  
6. When the utility displays the message that the upgrade is complete, remove the diskette. Press  
<Enter>.  
7. The computer will reboot and the changes will take effect.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Firmware Update Utility  
The Firmware Update Utility is a DOS-based program that updates the BMC’s firmware code.  
You need to run the utility only if new firmware code is necessary.  
Running the Firmware Update Utility  
1. Create a DOS-bootable diskette. The version of DOS must be 6.0 or higher.  
2. Place the firmware update utility (FWUPDATE.EXE) and the *.hex file on the diskette. Make  
a note of the *.hex file name, because you will need it later.  
3. Insert the diskette into the drive and boot to it.  
4. At the DOS prompt, run the executable file (FWUPDATE.EXE).  
5. The utility will display a menu screen. Select Upload Flash.  
6. The utility will ask for a file name. Enter the name of the *.hex file.  
7. The program will load the file and then ask if it should upload boot block. Read the release  
notes accompanying your system to verify that a boot block upgrade is not needed. If it is not,  
press “N” to continue.  
8. The program will next ask if it should upload operational code. Press “Y” to continue.  
9. Once the operational code has been updated and verified, press any key to continue. Then  
press <ESC> to exit the program.  
10. Shut the system down and remove any diskettes in the system.  
11. Disconnect all AC power cords from the system and wait 60 seconds.  
12. Reconnect the AC power cords and power up the system.  
Installing Video Drivers  
After configuring the system, you need to install video drivers to take full advantage of the features  
of the onboard ATI Rage XL SVGA video controller.  
The configuration software CD-ROM includes video drivers for use with DOS and  
Windows NT. Check the README.TXT file on the CD-ROM for information on installing  
these drivers.  
For other operating systems, see your OS instructions for installing device drivers.  
Using the QLogic SCSI Utility  
The QLogic SCSI utility detects the SCSI host adapters on the system board. Use the utility to:  
Change default values.  
Check and/or change SCSI device settings that may conflict with those of other devices in the  
server.  
Running the SCSI Utility  
When this message appears on the video monitor:  
Press Ctrl-C to start QLogic Configuration Utility...  
Press <Alt+Q> to run the utility. When it appears, choose the host adapter that you want to  
configure.NK PAGE  
80  
Configuration Software and Utilities  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and  
Power Supplies  
Tools and Supplies Needed  
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#2 bit)  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
To record the model and serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent  
information about the server, see Appendix B, “Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets” on  
page 197. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hot-Swapping Fans  
When the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on, you can determine which fan is  
defective by checking each yellow fan failure LED mounted next to each fan. When a fan fails,  
the LED on the front panel will be on continuously. You must hot-swap the failed fan—remove  
and replace it—with a good one. You DO NOT need to shut down the server to hot-swap a failed  
fan.  
CAUTION  
Even though the server can continue operating with only five fans, the  
defective fan must be replaced in a reasonable amount of time.  
Removing a Fan  
See Figure 15  
1. Remove the screw (A) that secures the fan array cover (B).  
2. Slide the fan array cover to the server front to free it from the locking tabs. Lift the cover.  
3. Look at the yellow fan failure LEDs to determine which fan is defective.  
4. Insert your thumb and forefinger into the grasp holes (B in Figure 15) of the failed fan.  
5. Pull the fan straight up, out of the housing. Set it aside.  
Replacing a Fan  
See Figure 15  
1. Remove the new fan from its protective packaging.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the fan in your equipment log (page 197).  
NOTE  
Fans are keyed and can be inserted in only one way. Be sure that the fan  
connector mates with the front panel connector when aligning the fan in the  
fan cavity.  
82  
Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Align the fan with the fan cavity.  
4. Push straight down on the fan until it is fully seated in the cavity.  
5. Replace the fan array cover with its securing screw.  
C
D
B
A
OM10702  
Figure 15. Removing/Hot-swapping a Fan  
A. Fan cover screw  
B. Fan cover  
C. Grasp holes  
D. Fan  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hot-Swapping a SCSI Hard Drive  
Hot-Swapping Bays  
Two 3.5-inch hot-swapping bays provide space for 3.5 inches X 1 inches (or 1.6 inches) single  
connector attachment (SCA2) SCSI hard disk drives. You can install up to two industry-standard  
wide/ultra or wide/ultra2 SCA-type hard disk drives in these bays.  
The power supply fans provide cooling for the hot swap drives. A system with two power supplies  
is capable of cooling most drives that would be installed into the system. However, drives that  
dissipate a large amount of power might require three power supplies to ensure proper cooling.  
See the product specifications to determine if the particular drive to be installed needs the  
additional cooling provided by a third power supply.  
Carriers for 3.5-inch wide 1-inch or 1.6-inch height drives allow easy hot-swapping of drives in  
and out of these bays without shutting down the server.  
You can easily set up RAIDapplications if you install a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks  
(RAID) controller board on the PHP I/O carrier, RAID software, and SCSI hard disk drives in the  
hot-swapping bays.  
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives  
The server supports a variety of single-ended SCSI SCA-type hard disk drives. As shipped from  
the supplier, the server might not contain any drives. Contact your sales representative or dealer  
for a list of approved drives that can be installed in the server.  
Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier  
See Figure 16 and Figure 17 (page 85).  
1. Remove the 3.5-inch hard disk drive from the protective wrapper, and place it on an antistatic  
surface.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.  
3. Orient the drive carrier so that the handle is toward your left and the metal EMI/ESD fingers  
are toward your right.  
4. Orient the drive so that:  
The drive’s label faces away from the carrier heatsink, toward the carrier fingers  
The drive’s connector faces away from the carrier handle  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to bend or damage the carrier’s metal fingers as you attach the  
drive to the carrier.  
5. Position the drive in the end of the carrier away from the handle, then slide the drive toward  
the handle.  
84  
Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Place the drive and carrier assembly on an antistatic surface of a table or a workbench so that  
the drive handle and fingers overlap the edge of the table or the workbench (see Figure 17).  
7. Using four screws of the appropriate size and length (not supplied), attach the carrier to the  
drive.  
CAUTION  
Some specific hard disk drive designs require electrical isolation of the drive  
from the chassis or other ground paths. These drives are usually clearly  
labeled with this requirement on the drive. Full-height, 1.6-inch drives with  
this requirement must have an electrical isolator like durable mylar tape  
placed between the EMI/ESD grounding fingers and the top cover of the  
drive. Failure to isolate this type of drive from the ground path will result in  
unpredictable operation of the drive, including severely impacted  
performance and data corruption.  
A
B
D
A
C
OM07153  
OM08268  
Figure 16. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier  
Figure 17. Mounting Hard Disk  
Drive to Carrier Assembly  
A. EMI/ESD grounding clips and fingers  
B. SCA connector  
C. SCSI hard disk drive  
D. Drive carrier handle  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-Swapping Bay  
See Figure 18.  
1. Orient the carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot-swapping bay guide rails so that metal  
fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up. Make sure that the  
carrier is placed correctly into the guide rails to avoid damage.  
2. While grasping only the drive carrier handle, firmly push the assembly into the bay until the  
drive docks with the hot-swapping backplane connector.  
CAUTION  
Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push  
the assembly into the bay, or you can damage the metal fingers of the  
bracket.  
A
OM07527  
Figure 18. Installing a Hard Disk Drive  
A. Drive carrier latch  
3. If you installed a RAID controller board, run the Disk Array Controller Configuration utility  
supplied with the board. See the manufacture’s documentation provided.  
86  
Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Determining Drive Status  
Status LEDs arranged in sets of three below each of the two hot-swapping bays monitor the status  
of each drive. When a yellow LED is on continuously, it is okay to hot-swap (remove and replace)  
a bad drive with a good one. You DO NOT need to shut down the server to hot-swap a drive.  
Table 13. SCSI Drive Status LED Descriptions  
SCSI drive present, SCSI drive  
SCSI drive  
faulty*  
power on  
active  
Green LED, A  
Green LED, B  
Yellow LED, C Description and action if needed  
Drive is present with power.  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Drive is present with power and is being  
accessed.  
Off  
Blinking  
Off  
Drive CAN be replaced. Steady yellow fault  
light indicates drive has a problem. Power to  
drive is off.  
On  
Drive SHOULD NOT be replaced at this time.  
A slowly blinking yellow fault light indicates that  
a drive that has just been replaced is in  
recovery mode (drive array being rebuilt).  
Power to drive is on.  
On  
Off  
Slow blinking  
There is no drive installed in the bay.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
*
The hot-swap controller is responsible for turning the yellow drive fault LED on or off according to the states specified  
by commands received via SAF-TE and IMB.  
1. Look at the yellow LEDs below the hot-swapping bays to determine which drive is bad.  
2. Push on the drive carrier latch of the bad drive, and while grasping the handle, pull the  
assembly toward you to disengage the drive from the backplane connector.  
3. Before moving the drive any further, wait 30 seconds. This elapsed time allows the drive  
platter to stop rotating.  
4. Carefully slide the assembly out of the bay, and place it on an antistatic surface.  
5. Orient the new carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot-swapping bay guide rails so that  
the metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up. Make  
sure you correctly place the carrier into the guide rails to avoid damage.  
6. While grasping only the drive carrier handle, firmly push the assembly into the bay until the  
driver carrier latches.  
CAUTION  
Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push  
the assembly into the bay. Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of  
the bracket.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hot-Swapping Power Supplies  
NOTE  
You must have three power supplies installed to hot-swap a supply. If you  
have only two supplies installed, they must occupy the left and center bays  
(as you face the back of the server — see Figure 19 on page 89).  
When the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on, you can determine which  
power supply is defective by checking the three status LEDs on the back of each supply. If a  
power supply fails, the yellow FAIL LED on the back of the power supply will be on continuously.  
You must hot-swap the power supply—remove and replace it—with a good one. If the server  
contains three power supplies, you DO NOT need to shut down the server to hot-swap a failed  
power supply.  
Green PWR (Power) LED—when blinking, AC is applied to the power supply and standby  
voltages are available. When on continuously, all power outputs are ready.  
Yellow FAIL(Power Supply Failure) LED—when on continuously, the power supply has  
failed and it must be replaced.  
Yellow PR_FL (Predictive Failure) LED—when blinking, the power supply is about to fail  
in the near future because the fan is performing poorly.  
Power Supply LEDs  
PWR (power)  
(Green)  
Off  
FAIL (power supply failure)  
(Yellow)  
Off  
PR_FL (predictive failure)  
(Yellow)  
Off  
Power Supply Status  
No AC power  
AC in/standby outputs on Blinking  
Off  
Off  
DC outputs on and okay  
Power supply failure  
Current limit  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Blinking/None Latch  
Off  
Predictive failure  
Blinking/Latched  
Hot-Swapping a Power Supply  
In a fully configured server, the power system contains three 750 watt autoranging power supplies;  
the third one is redundant. If a single power supply fails in the redundant power system, the  
yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on. You can easily hot-swap the  
defective power supply without turning the server power off.  
Power supplies are hot-swappable only in configurations with three power supplies.  
WARNING  
Because of chassis airflow disruption, the power supply bay should not  
be vacant for more than five minutes when server power is on.  
Exceeding the five-minute limit may cause damage to certain peripheral  
components.  
Before replacing a power supply in a two-power supply configuration,  
you must turn off power to the server.  
88  
Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a Power Supply  
CAUTIONS  
Turn off peripheral devices: If the chassis contains only two power  
supplies, turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server. Then turn  
off the server power with the push-button on/off switch on the front panel.  
Populate all bays: Figure 19 shows the far-right power supply bay vacant.  
To ensure correct airflow, you must populate this bay with a redundant  
power supply or cover panel. The figure is intended to show a power supply  
bay with the supply removed and not yet replaced, not an acceptable  
configuration for a system during operation.  
See Figure 19.  
1. Look at the yellow FAIL LEDs on the power supplies to determine which one is defective.  
2. Pull the power supply handle down to unlock it from the chassis.  
3. Pull the power supply straight back, out of the chassis. Set it aside.  
B
A
OM07324  
Figure 19. Removing a Power Supply  
A. Pull down handle first  
B. Slide power supply out  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing a Power Supply  
See Figure 19.  
1. Remove the new power supply from the protective packaging, and place it on an antistatic  
surface.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the power supply in your equipment log (page 197).  
3. Slide the replacement power supply into the power supply cavity.  
4. Lift the power supply handle to lock it into place.  
90  
Hot-Swapping Fans, SCSI Hard Drives, and Power Supplies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide  
5 Working Inside the System  
6 Upgrading Boardset Components  
7 Solving Problems  
8 Technical Reference  
A Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
B Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
C Regulatory Specifications  
D Warnings  
WARNING  
Only a QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN is authorized to remove  
the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server.  
Before removing the covers, see “Safety: Before You Remove Server  
Covers” on page 93 and “ Warnings and Cautions” on page 94.  
This manual is divided into two parts:  
User’s Guide, beginning on page 11—describes procedures that DO NOT REQUIRE internal  
server access. You do not need to be a qualified service technician to perform procedures  
listed in the User’s Guide.  
Service Technician’s Guide, beginning on page 91—describes procedures that REQUIRE  
internal server access. You must be a qualified service technician to perform procedures listed  
in the Service Technician’s Guide.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Working Inside the System  
This chapter describes procedures for removing and installing most components inside the system.  
Table 14 lists these procedures and their page numbers in this chapter.  
Table 14. Procedures in Chapter 5  
Item  
Page  
95  
Item  
Page  
113  
116  
117  
117  
119  
121  
124  
126  
Front bezels  
I/O tray  
Server covers  
Fan array housing  
LCD module  
95  
ICMB board  
101  
102  
104  
106  
108  
111  
113  
AC filter and cable  
Peripheral bay  
Peripheral bay backplane  
Peripheral bay blind mate board  
Diskette drive  
Profusion carrier tray  
Front panel controller board  
Add-in boards  
I/O riser board  
PHP LED Board  
Peripheral drives  
Tools and Supplies Needed  
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 and #2 bit).  
Small flat-bladed screwdriver.  
Jumper removal tool or needle-nosed pliers.  
Antistatic wrist strap and conductive foam pad (recommended).  
Pen or pencil.  
Equipment log: as you integrate new parts into the system, add information about them to  
your equipment log (page 197). Record the model and serial number of the system, all  
installed options, and any other pertinent information specific to the system. You will need  
this information when running the SSU.  
Safety: Before You Remove Server Covers  
Before removing covers at any time to work inside the system, observe these safety guidelines.  
1. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the system.  
2. Turn off the system by using the push-button on/off power switch on the front of the system.  
3. Unplug the AC power cords from the system or wall outlet.  
4. Label and disconnect all peripheral cables and all telecommunication lines connected to  
I/O connectors or ports on the back of the system.  
5. Provide some electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap  
attached to chassis ground of the system—any unpainted metal surface—when handling  
components.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings and Cautions  
These warnings and cautions apply whenever you remove covers of the system. Only a technically  
qualified person should integrate and configure the system.  
WARNINGS  
System power on/off: The on/off button (a convex button) on the  
front panel DOES NOT turn off the system AC power. To remove  
power from system, you must unplug the AC power cords from the wall  
outlet or the system.  
Hazardous conditions, power supply: Hazardous voltage, current,  
and energy levels are present inside the power supply. There are no  
user-serviceable parts inside it; servicing should be done by technically  
qualified personnel.  
Hazardous conditions, devices, and cables: Hazardous electrical  
conditions may be present on power, telephone, and communication  
cables. Turn off the system and disconnect the power cords,  
telecommunications systems, networks, and modems attached to the  
system before opening it. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment  
damage can result.  
CAUTIONS  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) and ESD protection: ESD can  
damage disk drives, boards, and other parts. We recommend that you do all  
procedures in this chapter only at an ESD-protected workstation. If one is  
not available, provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist  
strap attached to chassis ground any unpainted metal surface on your  
system when handling parts.  
ESD and handling boards: Always handle boards carefully. They can  
be extremely sensitive to ESD. Hold boards only by their edges. After  
removing a board from its protective wrapper or from the system, place it  
component-side UP on a grounded, static-free surface. If you place the  
I/O carrier on a conductive surface, the battery leads may short out. If they  
do, this will result in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery. Use a  
conductive foam pad if available but NOT the board wrapper. Do not slide  
board over any surface.  
Cooling and airflow: For proper cooling and airflow, always install the  
chassis covers before turning on the system. Operating the system without  
the covers in place can damage system parts.  
94  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing and Installing the Front Bezels  
See Figure 20.  
1. Use the finger grips to pull the bezels away from the chassis.  
2. Remove the bottom bezel to access the hot-swap drives and the peripheral bay.  
3. Remove the top bezel to access the following:  
Front side of the fan bay.  
Front panel controller switches (power, reset, and nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) and  
indicator lights (power indicator, predictive power supply failure, predictive fan failure,  
and hard drive failure).  
4. Reinstall the bottom bezel by aligning the clips with the ball studs on the chassis and pushing  
the bezel onto the chassis.  
5. Reinstall the top bezel by aligning the ball studs with the clips on the chassis and pushing the  
bezel onto the chassis.  
B
A
OM10705  
Figure 20. Removing the Front Bezels  
A. Bottom Bezel  
B. Top Bezel  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing and Installing Server Covers  
See Figure 21. The server comes with several removable covers:  
The fan array cover provides access to the 6-fan array.  
The PCI bus hot-plug cover provides assess to the PCI bus hot-plug slots.  
The top cover provides access to the profusion carrier, I/O carrier, and 240 VA protective  
cover. You must remove the top cover before you can remove the 240 VA protective cover.  
The memory module cover provides access to the two memory modules.  
CAUTION  
For proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server with the covers  
removed. Always reinstall them before turning on the server.  
D
C
B
A
OM07514  
Figure 21. Server Covers  
A. Memory module cover  
B. Fan array cover  
C. Top cover  
D. PCI hot-plug cover  
96  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover  
See Figure 22.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove and save the screws that attach the PCI bus hot-plug cover to the chassis.  
3. While facing the front of the server, push the PCI cover toward the back of the server to  
disengage the tabs from the top cover.  
4. Remove the cover and set it aside.  
A
OM10750  
Figure 22. Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover  
A. Screws (2)  
Installing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover  
1. Ensure that add-in boards are firmly seated in their respective slots and that the retaining  
brackets for the add-in boards are reinstalled.  
2. Position the hot-plug cover over the top cover so that the tabs along its edges align with the  
slots in the top cover.  
3. Lower the hot-plug cover until it rests on the top cover.  
4. Push the hot-plug cover toward the front of the server to engage the row of tabs attaching the  
hot-plug cover to the top cover.  
5. Attach the hot-plug cover to the top cover using the screws you removed earlier.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Top Cover  
See Figure 23 (page 98) and Figure 24 (page 99).  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server.  
3. Turn the server off with the push-button on/off power switch on the front panel.  
4. Unplug the AC power cord from the power inlet receptacle, or from the power source outlet.  
5. Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I/O panel on the back of the server.  
6. Remove and save the screws that attach the top cover to the chassis.  
NOTE  
It is not necessary to remove the PCI bus hot-plug cover.  
7. While facing the front of the server, push the top cover toward the back of the chassis to  
disengage the row of tabs attaching the cover to the chassis.  
8. Push the cover back about an inch, then lift it straight up. Set the cover aside.  
9. Lift the 240 VA protective cover from the chassis (see Figure 24 on page 99).  
A
OM11017  
Figure 23. Removing the Top Cover  
A. Two screws  
98  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OM11029  
Figure 24. Removing the 240 VA Protective Cover  
Installing the Top Cover  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Install the 240 VA protective cover.  
3. While facing the back of the server, position the top cover over the chassis so that the tabs  
along the edges of the cover align with the slots in the top edge of the chassis.  
4. Gently lower the cover straight down on top of the server.  
5. Place your hands on opposite sides of the cover, then push the cover forward to seat it.  
6. Attach the cover to the chassis with the screws you removed earlier, and tighten them firmly  
(6.0 inch-pounds).  
7. Connect all external cables and power cords to the server.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Memory Module Cover  
See Figure 25.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the four screws securing the memory module cover and remove the cover.  
A
OM10703  
Figure 25. Removing the Memory Module Cover and Memory Module  
A. Memory module cover  
Installing the Memory Module Cover  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Place the cover in position.  
3. Attach the cover to the chassis with the screws you removed earlier.  
100  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fan Array Housing  
Removing the Fan Array Housing  
See Figure 26 (page 102).  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the following:  
Top cover (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
Fan array assembly cover and all fans (see “Hot Swapping Fans” on page 82).  
Memory module cover (see “Removing the Memory Module Cover” on page 100).  
3. Remove and save the three screws that secure the fan housing to the chassis.  
4. Use the frame of the housing (the space the individual fans occupied) as a handle to remove  
the housing:  
Tip the fan assembly forward.  
Slide the alignment pins free from the front edge of the profusion carrier.  
Pull the housing straight up, away from the chassis, then set it aside.  
Installing the Fan Array Housing  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Reinstall the fan array housing ensuring that it engages with the support tabs (A in Figure 26).  
NOTE  
When installing the fan array housing, be careful not to accidentally move  
the thin sheet of insulating material on the front panel board. Proper  
insertion of the LED light pipes depends on the correct alignment of the  
insulating material.  
3. Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
4. Reinstall each fan assembly. The fan assemblies are keyed and can be installed in only one way.  
5. Reinstall the top cover, the fan array assembly cover, and the memory module cover.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
A
A
A
OM10692  
Figure 26. Removing the Fan Housing  
A. Screws (three)  
B. Fan housing  
LCD Module  
The LCD module displays server information.  
Removing the LCD Module  
See Figure 27.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the memory module cover (see “Removing the Memory Module Cover” on  
page 100).  
3. Remove the fan array housing (see “Removing the Fan Array Housing” on page 101).  
4. Disconnect the LCD module data and power cables from the front panel board.  
NOTE  
The data cable connector on the front panel board has a lever on each side.  
To free the cable from the connector, spread the levers apart (pull their ends  
away from each other). The cable disconnects enough that you can remove  
it fully with your fingers.  
5. Remove the screw securing the LCD module to the chassis, and slide the tab on the left side of  
the LCD module out of the slot. Set the module aside.  
102  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the LCD Module  
See Figure 27.  
1. Connect the LCD module data and power cables to the front panel board. To attach the data  
cable, insert the connector end of the cable into the connector on the front panel board. This  
action causes the two levers on the board connector to close slightly. When that happens, push  
the levers together until the cable connector is fully seated in the board connector.  
NOTE  
Verify that both cables are below the sheet of insulating material above the  
front panel board.  
2. Insert the tab on the left side of the LCD module into the slot and insert the screw on the right  
side of the module that you removed earlier and tighten it firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
3. Install the fan array housing.  
4. Install the memory module cover.  
B
A
OM10704  
Figure 27. Removing the LCD Module  
A. Memory module cover  
B. LCD module  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Profusion Carrier Tray  
The profusion carrier tray provides rigid mounting for the front panel board, the profusion carrier,  
and the memory modules. It also facilitates mating the profusion carrier with the midplane.  
Removing the Profusion Carrier Tray  
See Figure 28.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the:  
Top cover (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
Memory module cover (see “Removing the Memory Module Cover” on page 100).  
Fan array housing (see “Removing the Fan Array Housing” on page 101).  
Memory modules (see “Removing a Memory Module” on page 142).  
Processors (see “Removing a Processor” on page 148).  
3. Remove the ten screws (five each side) that secure the tray to the chassis.  
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers to eject the tray out of the midplane.  
5. Slide the tray from the chassis.  
Installing the Profusion Carrier Tray  
See Figure 28.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Carefully position the tray on the guide rails and slide the tray into the chassis.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to pinch the cables coming from the peripheral bay when  
reinstalling the tray.  
3. Ensure that the midplane and profusion carrier tray connectors are properly aligned.  
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers to mate the tray grand connector with the  
midplane grand connector. Ensure that the lower tray guide engages with the tray support  
attached to the peripheral bay.  
5. Use the two screws you removed earlier to secure the tray to the chassis.  
6. Install the processor retention module.  
7. Install the processors (see page 149).  
104  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Install the memory modules (see page 142).  
9. Install the fan array housing (page 101).  
10. Install the top cover (page 99) and memory module cover (page 100).  
A
A
C
B
B
OM10709  
Figure 28. Removing the Profusion Carrier Tray  
A. Screws (five)  
B. Eject/Insert levers  
C. Slide the tray from the chassis  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Panel Controller Board  
The front panel board contains the server controls and indicators. It is mounted on snap-on and  
threaded standoffs on the profusion carrier tray.  
Removing the Front Panel Controller Board  
See Figure 29.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the:  
Top cover (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
Fan array housing (see “Removing the Fan Array Housing” on page 101).  
LCD module (see “Removing the LCD Module” on page 102).  
3. Remove the insulating material from the front panel controller board.  
4. Remove the nine screws that attach the board to the chassis.  
5. Using even pressure, slide the board straight toward the front of the chassis. The connector  
attaching the board to the profusion carrier is at the left (A in Figure 29), so be sure to pull the  
board STRAIGHT and not twist it.  
CAUTION  
When the front panel controller board is free of the profusion carrier tray  
connector, its switches are surrounded by sheetmetal. Be careful not to  
damage these switches when lifting the front panel board.  
6. Push/pull the front panel board horizontally to free it from the profusion carrier connector, and  
lift the board from the chassis.  
7. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Installing the Front Panel Controller Board  
See Figure 29.  
CAUTION  
When positioning the front panel board for reinstallation, be sure its  
switches are in the sheetmetal holes before mating its connector with the  
profusion carrier. If the switches are not in the holes, they might be  
damaged.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Position the front panel board over the threaded standoffs with its switches protruding through  
the sheetmetal holes.  
3. Push the board horizontally to mate the connector with the profusion carrier connector.  
4. Insert the screws you removed earlier loosely into the threaded standoffs.  
5. Make sure the board is properly seated, then tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
106  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Install the LCD module (see “LCD Module” on page 102).  
7. Install the insulating material removed earlier from the front panel board.  
8. Install the fan array housing (see “Fan Array Housing” on page 101).  
9. Install the top cover (see “Installing the Top Cover” on page 99).  
A
B
C
= D  
= E  
OM07322  
Figure 29. Front Panel Controller Board  
A. Profusion carrier connector  
B. LCD data connector  
C. LCD power connector  
D. Snap-on standoffs (two)  
E. Screws (seven)  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Add-In Boards  
The PHP I/O carrier provides 10 PCI bus master slots.  
CAUTION  
Do not overload the PHP I/O carrier by installing add-in boards that draw  
excessive current. For expansion slot current limitations, see Appendix A,  
“Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage” on page 191.  
Add-in boards can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful  
handling. After removing the board from the protective wrapper or from the  
carrier, place it component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
Do not slide the board over any surface.  
NOTE  
Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add-in board.  
Installing/Replacing an Add-In Board  
You can install an add-in board when the server is operating or not operating. The following  
procedure describes both scenarios.  
The enhanced PCI hot-plug (EPHP) mechanism is a rotating part that actuates a switch located on  
the EPHP board. Each PCI slot has four indicator LEDs: two on the outside and two on the inside  
of the system. After the LED shows which slot is powered down, you can press the EPHP  
mechanism on the actuator, rotate the mechanism, and remove the PCI board. After a new  
PCI board is installed, rotate the EPHP mechanism back into place to activate the switch and  
secure the board.  
See Figure 30 (page 109) and Figure 31 (page 110).  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the PCI bus hot-plug cover (see “Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover,” page 97).  
CAUTION  
Some accessory/option board outputs exceed Class 2 or limited power  
source limits and must use appropriate interconnecting cabling in  
accordance with the national electric code during installation.  
108  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
A
B
D
OM08752  
Figure 30. Enhanced PHP Functionality on Add-in Board Slots  
A. PHP LED board  
B. EPHP mechanism  
C. EPHP actuator  
D. EPHP mechanism, open position  
3. Being careful not to touch the components or gold edge connectors on the add-in board,  
remove it from the protective wrapper, and place it component-side up on a nonconductive,  
antistatic surface.  
4. Record the serial number of the board in your equipment log (see page 197).  
5. Set any jumpers or switches according to the board manufacturer’s instructions.  
6. If your server is not operating, skip this step. If your server is operating:  
Access the PCI hot-plug utility on the CD-ROM that came with your server.  
Use the PCI hot-plug utility to power down the appropriate PCI slot.  
7. Press the EPHP mechanism on the actuator (C), then rotate the mechanism to free the PCI  
board from its connector.  
8. Remove the I/O slot filler panel for the appropriate slot.  
9. Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners, and firmly press it into an expansion slot on  
the PHP I/O carrier (see Figure 31). The tapered foot of the processor retaining bracket must  
fit into the mating slot in the expansion slot frame.  
10. Secure the add-in board to the expansion slot frame using the power enabling switch actuator  
(rotate the EPHP mechanism back into place) and expansion slot cover retaining screw.  
11. Connect any required cabling to the add-in board.  
12. If your server is not operating, skip this step. If your server is operating:  
Use the PCI hot-plug utility to power up the PCI slot.  
13. Reinstall the top and cover (see “Installing the Top Cover” on page 99).  
14. Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add-in board. For information about running this  
utility, see “Using the System Setup Utility (SSU) on page 51.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
B
OM10700  
Figure 31. Installing an Add-in Board  
A. Add-In Board  
B. EPHP Mechanism  
110  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing an Add-In Board  
You can remove an add-in board when the server is operating or not operating. The following  
procedure describes both scenarios.  
CAUTION  
Expansion slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots to maintain the  
electromagnetic emission characteristics of the server and to ensure proper  
cooling of the server components.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the PCI bus hot-plug cover (see “Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover” on  
page 97).  
3. Disconnect any cables attached to the board you are removing.  
4. Remove and save the screw securing the add-in board to the expansion slot frame.  
5. If your server is NOT operating, skip this step. If your server IS operating:  
Access the PHP GUI on the CD-ROM that came with your server.  
Use the PHP GUI to power down the appropriate PCI slot.  
6. Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners, and carefully pull it upward until the edge  
connector of the board pulls free from the connector on the PHP I/O carrier. Make sure that  
you do not scrape the board against other components.  
7. Store the board in an antistatic protective wrapper.  
8. Install an expansion slot cover (see Figure 30 on page 109) over the vacant slot. The tapered  
foot of the cover must fit into the mating slot in the bottom of the expansion slot frame.  
9. Install the power enabling switch actuator over the vacant slot. The spring at the end of the  
actuator rests on the power enabling switch.  
10. Secure the cover and actuator to the frame using the retaining screw.  
11. Reinstall the top cover (see “Installing the Top Cover” on page 99).  
I/O Riser Board  
Removing the I/O Riser Board  
See Figure 32.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Verify that system power is OFF and that the AC power cord is removed from the back of the  
system, and that all cables (mouse, keyboard, etc.) are disconnected from the I/O back panel.  
3. Remove the top cover and 240 VA protective covers (see “Removing the Top Cover” on  
page 98).  
4. Disconnect the ICMB signal cable from the I/O riser board (A in Figure 32).  
5. Remove and save the screw (B in Figure 32).  
6. Holding the board by the top edge or upper corners, pull it straight upward, away from the  
PHP I/O carrier until the edge connector of the board pulls free from its connector. Make sure  
that you do not scrape the board against other components.  
7. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the I/O Riser Board  
See Figure 32.  
1. Remove the I/O riser board from its antistatic protective wrapper.  
2. Holding the board by the top edge or upper corners, carefully insert the edge connector of the  
board into the connector on the PHP I/O carrier. Press the board firmly into the connector  
until it is fully seated.  
3. Insert the screw you removed earlier in the threaded hole in the chassis (B in Figure 32).  
Tighten the screw firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
4. Connect the ICMB signal cable to the riser board (A in Figure 32).  
5. Reinstall the top and 240 VA protective covers (see “Installing the Top Cover” on page 99).  
B
A
OM07323  
Figure 32. I/O Riser Board  
A. I/O connector  
B. Screw  
112  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PHP LED Board  
Removing a PHP LED Board  
See Figure 33.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
3. Remove the Non-Hot Plug cover by inserting thumb and forefinger into the two holes on the  
top of the cover, then carefully lift up it up.  
4. Disconnect Plug P2 from the PHP LED board.  
5. Press and rotate all PHP switches to the open position.  
6. To free the board from the chassis, pull out and disengage the five plastic retaining pins.  
A
B
C
OM08780  
Figure 33. PHP LED Board  
A. PHP LED board  
B. Retaining pin  
C. PHP LED cable  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a PHP LED Board  
See Figure 33.  
1. Carefully position the PHP LED board by aligning each of the five plastic retaining pins to  
their corresponding positions on the chassis.  
2. Once aligned, push in the five plastic retaining pins, locking the PHP LED board into position.  
3. Connect Plug P2 to the PHP LED board.  
4. Replace the Non-Hot Plug cover.  
5. Replace the top cover (see “Installing the Top Cover on page 99).  
I/O Tray  
The I/O tray provides rigid mounting for the PHP I/O carrier and facilitates mating the I/O carrier  
with the midplane.  
Removing the I/O Tray  
See Figure 34.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Verify that system power is OFF and that the AC power cord is removed from the back of the  
system.  
3. Remove the top and 240 VA protective covers (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
4. Label and disconnect all cables connected to the add-in boards installed in the expansion slots.  
5. Remove all add-in boards (see “Add-In Boards” on page 108).  
6. Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the PHP I/O carrier.  
7. Remove and save the four screws securing the tray to the chassis.  
8. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers to eject the tray from the midplane. The levers are  
labeled “B” in Figure 34.  
9. Lift the tray from the chassis.  
114  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the I/O Tray  
See Figure 34.  
1. Position the tray over the chassis and lower it onto its supports.  
2. Ensure that the midplane and I/O carrier tray connectors are properly aligned.  
3. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers into the locked position. This action also mates  
the PHP I/O carrier connector with the midplane connector.  
4. Use the screws you removed earlier to secure the I/O tray to the chassis.  
5. Connect all internal cables to the PHP I/O carrier.  
6. Install all add-in boards (see “Add-In Boards” on page 108).  
7. Connect all peripheral device cables connected to the I/O panel on the back of the system.  
8. Install the top and 240 VA protective covers (see “Installing the Top Cover” on page 99).  
C
A
B
B
A
A
OM10653  
Figure 34. Removing the I/O Tray  
A. Screws (four)  
B. Eject/insert levers  
C. I/O tray  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board  
Removing the ICMB Board  
See Figure 35.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the top and 240 VA protective covers (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
3. Disconnect the ICMB signal cable from its connector on the I/O riser board.  
4. Remove and save the screw that attaches the ICMB board to the I/O tray.  
5. Push on the tabs of the snap-on standoff and pull the board toward the front of the chassis to  
remove it from the snap-on standoff.  
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Installing the ICMB Board  
See Figure 35.  
1. Remove the ICMB board from its protective wrapper.  
2. Position the board over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the I/O tray.  
3. Press the board onto the snap-on standoff, and insert the screw loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
4. Make sure the board is properly aligned, then tighten the screw firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Connect the signal cable to its connector on the I/O riser board.  
6. Reinstall the top and 240 VA protective covers (see “Installing the Top Cover” on page 99).  
OM07518  
Figure 35. Removing the ICMB Board  
116  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC Filter and Cable  
Removing the AC Filter and Cable  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the midplane, but leave it attached to its support bracket (see “Removing the  
Midplane” on page 140).  
3. Remove and save the screws that attach the AC filter to that chassis.  
4. Remove and save the screws that attach the AC plugs to the chassis.  
5. Remove the three plug retaining brackets.  
6. Remove the AC filter and cable.  
Installing the AC Filter and Cable  
1. Remove the AC filter and cable from its protective wrapper.  
2. Place the cable in position inside the chassis.  
3. Install the three plug retaining brackets; secure them with the screws you removed earlier.  
4. Install the AC filter.  
5. Install the midplane (see “Installing the Midplane” on page 140).  
Peripheral Bay  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to scrape the diskette drive data cable on memory DIMMs  
when you remove or install the peripheral bay. Damage to the cable and  
DIMMs could occur.  
Removing the Peripheral Bay  
See Figure 36.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the memory module cover (see “Removing the Memory Module Cover” on  
page 100).  
3. Remove and save the four screws that secure the peripheral bay to the chassis.  
4. Using the profusion carrier support as a handle (the rectangular metal piece that protrudes  
vertically from the top of the peripheral bay), slide the bay straight out, away from the center  
of the chassis.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Peripheral Bay  
See Figure 36.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Position the peripheral bay so that it rests on the bottom of the chassis with the drives facing  
the chassis front.  
3. Using the profusion carrier support as a handle, slide the peripheral bay straight inward,  
toward the center of the chassis.  
4. Use even pressure to mate the connector on the back of the peripheral bay (on the peripheral  
bay backplane) to the blind mate board in the chassis.  
5. Install the four screws removed earlier.  
6. Install the memory module cover (see “Installing the Memory Module Cover” on page 100).  
OM07508  
Figure 36. Peripheral Bay  
118  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Bay Backplane  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Backplane  
See Figure 37.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove SCSI drives from peripheral bay (see “Hot-Swapping a SCSI Hard Drive” on  
page 84).  
3. Remove peripheral bay (see “Removing the Peripheral Bay” on page 117).  
4. Label and disconnect the diskette and CD-ROM power and data cables from the backplane.  
5. Remove and save the eight screws that attach the backplane to the peripheral bay.  
6. Lift the backplane straight up and away from the peripheral bay.  
7. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Peripheral Bay Backplane  
See Figure 37.  
1. Remove the board from its protective wrapper.  
2. Position and align the board over the two alignment pins.  
3. Attach the eight screws removed earlier.  
4. Connect the diskette and CD-ROM power and data cables to their connectors on the backplane.  
5. Install the peripheral bay in the chassis (see “Installing the Peripheral Bay” on page 118).  
6. Install SCSI drives (see “Hot-Swapping a SCSI Hard Drive” on page 84).  
A
B
C
D
E
H
G
F
OM07503  
Figure 37. Peripheral Bay Backplane  
A. Hot-swap hard disk drive connector  
B. Hot-swap hard disk drive connector  
C. Power connector  
D. Diskette drive data connector  
E. CD-ROM drive data connector  
F. Dual CD-ROM/diskette drive power connector  
G. Blind mate board connector  
H. SCSI cable connector  
120  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board  
See Figure 38.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the profusion carrier tray (see “Removing the Profusion Carrier Tray” on page 104).  
3. Remove the peripheral bay (see “Removing the Peripheral Bay” on page 117).  
4. Label and disconnect all cables connected to the blind mate board (see Figure 39, on  
page 123).  
5. Remove and save the two screws that attach the board to its support in the chassis, then  
remove the board.  
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
OM10701  
Figure 38. Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board  
A. Screws (two)  
122  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
B
C
D
E
OM10708  
Figure 39. Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board Cables  
A. Blind Mate connector header  
B. 20-pin power connector  
C. Wide SCSI connector  
D. 40-pin IDE connector  
E. 34-pin header (floppy)  
Installing the Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board  
See Figure 38.  
1. Remove the board from its protective wrapper.  
2. Position the board against its support in the chassis, then attach it with the four screws you  
removed earlier.  
3. Connect all previously removed cables to the board.  
4. Install the peripheral bay (see “Installing the Peripheral Bay).  
5. Install the profusion carrier tray (see “Installing the Profusion Carrier Tray” on page 104).  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diskette Drive  
Removing the Diskette Drive  
See Figure 40.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the peripheral bay (see “Removing the Peripheral Bay” on page 117).  
3. Remove retaining screw at the front side of the diskette drive.  
NOTE: Cabling for Diskette and CD-ROM Drives  
You cannot remove the diskette drive from the chassis by simply removing its  
cables from the peripheral bay backplane. The diskette drive power cable  
attaches to the back of the CD-ROM drive. A power cable for both drives exits  
the CD-ROM and connects to the peripheral bay backplane. Therefore, you  
must remove cables from the drives themselves to remove a particular drive.  
4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the diskette drive.  
5. Pull the diskette drive forward and out of the peripheral bay.  
A. Screw attaching the  
B
drive/carrier assembly to  
the chassis  
B. Screws attaching the  
carrier to the drive  
A
OM07360  
Figure 40. Removing the Diskette Drive  
124  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Place the drive/carrier assembly component-side up on an antistatic surface.  
7. Remove and save the screws that hold the carrier to the drive.  
8. Place the drive in an antistatic protective wrapper.  
Installing the Diskette Drive  
1. Remove the new 3.5-inch diskette drive from its protective wrapper, and place it  
component-side up on an antistatic surface. Record the drive model and serial numbers in  
your equipment log (see page 197).  
2. Set any jumpers or switches according to the drive manufacturers instructions.  
3. Place the drive carrier on the noncomponent side of the drive, and align the mounting holes.  
4. Attach the carrier to the drive with screws of the appropriate size and length (reuse the screws  
you removed before). Tighten the screws firmly (between 4.0 and 6.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Position the drive in its opening in the front of the chassis, on top of the CD-ROM drive.  
6. Slide the drive into the chassis until the frame of the carrier rests against the front of the  
chassis. When positioned properly, the tab on the left of the carrier mates with its  
corresponding slot in the chassis, and the screw hole on the right of the carrier aligns with its  
corresponding hole in the chassis.  
7. Secure the drive/carrier assembly to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier; tighten the  
screw firmly (6.0 inch-pounds).  
8. Connect the data and power cables to the drive.  
9. Install the peripheral bay (see “Installing the Peripheral Bay” on page 118).  
10. Run the SSU to specify that the diskette drive is installed in the system.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripheral Drives  
Installing a 5.25-inch Peripheral in the Front Bay  
One 5.25-inch half-height bay provides space for a tape backup, CD-ROM, or other removable  
media drive.  
CAUTIONS  
Do not install hard drives in 5.25-inch bays: We recommend that you do  
NOT install hard drives in the 5.25-inch bays. The drives cannot be properly  
cooled in this location; also, a hard drive generates EMI and is therefore  
more susceptible to ESD in this location.  
NOTES  
Save the filler panels and EMI shields: System EMI integrity and cooling  
are both protected by having drives installed in the bays or filler panels and  
EMI shields covering the bays. When you install a drive, save the panel and  
shield to reinstall in case you should later remove the drive and not reinstall  
one in the same bay.  
Bus termination when installing SCSI devices: It is important that your  
cabling and connections meet the SCSI bus specification. Otherwise, the  
bus could be unreliable and data corruption could occur or devices might not  
work at all. The SCSI bus needs to be terminated at the end of the cable;  
this is usually provided by the last SCSI device on the cable. For more  
information on connecting the data cable to a drive, see step 9 on page 127.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the peripheral bay (see “Removing the Peripheral Bay” on page 117).  
3. Remove the drive from its protective wrapper, and place it on an antistatic surface.  
4. Record the drive model and serial numbers in your equipment log (page 197).  
5. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to the drive manufacturer’s instructions.  
6. Using two screws of the appropriate size and length (not supplied), attach each plastic slide rail  
and its metal grounding plate to the drive.  
126  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
B
A
C
OM08013  
Figure 41. Snap-in Plastic Slide Rails  
A. Tape drive or other removable media device  
B. Tab on slide rail  
C. Screws (4)  
D. Slide rails (2)  
7. Position the drive so the plastic slide rails engage in the bay guide rails. Push the drive into the  
bay until the slide rails lock in place.  
8. Connect a power cable to the drive. The connectors are keyed and can be inserted in only one  
way.  
9. Connect the data cable to the drive. The connectors are keyed and can be inserted in only one  
way.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a 5.25-inch Peripheral from the Front Bay  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the peripheral bay (see “Removing the Peripheral Bay” on page 117).  
3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive.  
4. The drive has two protruding plastic, snap-in rails attached. Squeeze the rail tabs toward each  
other as you carefully slide the drive forward out of the bay, and place it on an antistatic  
surface.  
5. Remove and save the four screws and two slide rails.  
6. If you leave the bay empty, install a stainless steel EMI shield on the bay for proper cooling  
and airflow.  
7. If you do not replace a SCSI device with another SCSI device, modify the cable and  
termination arrangement so that a proper termination exists at the end of the cable (it can be a  
termination device only, not necessarily a SCSI peripheral).  
D
B
A
E
C
OM07359  
Figure 42. Removing a Media Device  
A. CD-ROM Drive  
B. Plastic snap-in slide rail  
C. Retaining tab on rail  
D. Power cable  
E. Data cable  
128  
Working Inside the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Upgrading Boardset Components  
This chapter describes procedures for removing and installing major system boards and  
components. This includes procedures for:  
Table 15. Procedures in Chapter 6  
Item  
Page  
134  
134  
135  
136  
138  
Item  
Page  
140  
142  
147  
150  
152  
Cache Coherency Filters  
Processor retention bracket  
Mezzanine board(s)  
Profusion carrier  
PHP I/O carrier  
Midplane  
Memory modules and DIMMs  
Processors  
FSB Termination Board Assembly  
Backup battery  
Tools and Supplies Needed  
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 and #2 bit)  
Small flat-bladed screwdriver  
Jumper removal tool or needle-nosed pliers  
Antistatic wrist strap and conductive foam pad (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment log: as you integrate new parts into the system, add information about them to  
your equipment log (page 197). Record the model and serial number of the system, all  
installed options, and any other pertinent information specific to the system. You will need  
this information when running the SSU.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings and Cautions  
These warnings and cautions apply throughout this manual to any procedure in which you access  
the inside of the server.  
WARNINGS  
Avoid burns: If the system has been running, any installed processor  
and heat sink on the processor board(s) will be hot. To avoid the  
possibility of a burn, be careful when removing or installing components  
that are located near processors.  
System power on/off: The DC push-button on/off switch (a convex  
button) on the front panel DOES NOT turn off the system AC power.  
To remove power from system, you must unplug ALL AC power cords  
from the wall outlet.  
Hazardous conditions, devices, and cables: Hazardous electrical  
conditions may be present on power, telephone, and communication  
cables. Turn off the system and disconnect all power cords,  
telecommunications systems, networks, and modems attached to the  
system before opening it. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment  
damage can result.  
130  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTIONS  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) & ESD protection: ESD can damage  
disk drives, boards, and other parts. We recommend that you do all  
procedures in this chapter only at an ESD-protected workstation. If one is  
not available, provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist  
strap attached to chassis ground any unpainted metal surface on your  
system when handling parts.  
ESD and handling boards: Always handle boards carefully. They can  
be extremely sensitive to ESD. Hold boards only by their edges. After  
removing a board from its protective wrapper or from the system, place it  
component-side UP on a grounded, static-free surface. Use a conductive  
foam pad if available, but NOT the board wrapper. Do not slide board over  
any surface.  
Chassis covers, proper cooling, and airflow: For proper cooling and  
airflow, always install the chassis covers before turning on the system.  
Operating the system without the covers in place can damage system parts.  
Installing or removing jumpers: A jumper is a small, plastic-encased  
conductor that slips over two jumper pins. Newer jumpers have a small tab  
on top that you can grip with your fingertips or with a pair of fine, needle-  
nosed pliers. If your jumpers do not have such a tab, take care when using  
needle-nosed pliers to remove or install a jumper; grip the narrow sides of  
the jumper with the pliers, never the wide sides. Gripping the wide sides can  
damage the contacts inside the jumper, causing intermittent problems with  
the function controlled by that jumper. Take care to gently grip, but not  
squeeze, with the pliers or other tool you use to remove a jumper; you might  
bend or break the stake pins on the board.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cache Coherency Filters: Removing and Installing  
Removing the Cache Coherency Filters  
See Figure 43.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the Mezzanine Extraction Tool/Cache Hold Down bracket from the front of the  
processor retention bracket by pulling out the plastic retaining pin.  
3. Press down on the retaining latch, and pull the filter up and out of the connector.  
A
B
OM10691  
Figure 43. Removing the Cache Coherency Filters  
A. Retaining latch  
B. Keyed/notched edge  
132  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Cache Coherency Filters  
NOTE  
If the profusion carrier tray is removed, we recommend that you install the  
cache coherency filters before installing the profusion carrier tray.  
See Figure 43.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the Mezzanine Extraction Tool/Cache Coherency Hold Down from the front of the  
processor retention bracket by pulling out the plastic retaining pin.  
3. With the keyed or notched edge of the filter oriented toward the back of the system, insert the  
filter into the connector.  
4. Press down firmly on the filter until the front lock retaining latch moves to the locked position.  
5. Push up on the retaining latch to ensure the filter is properly locked into position.  
6. Replace the hold down bracket by aligning the tab and the plastic retaining pin on the front of  
the processor retention bracket. Once aligned, push in on the pin, locking the bracket in place.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Processor Retention Bracket: Removing and  
Installing  
Removing the Processor Retention Bracket  
See Figure 44.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the memory module (page 142).  
3. Remove the profusion carrier tray (page 104).  
4. Remove the cache coherency filters (page 132).  
5. Find the four metal latch verification brackets located on each side of the profusion carrier tray  
(two on each side).  
6. To release the latches, pull up and out on each tab and expose the four plastic mezzanine lock  
bars (two on each side).  
7. Release the plastic mezzanine lock bars by simultaneously squeezing the winged protruding  
end of the lock bar and pulling out and away from the profusion carrier tray.  
8. Carefully lift the processor retention bracket from the profusion carrier tray.  
B
C
A
D
OM10654  
Figure 44. Removing the Processor Retention Bracket  
A. Profusion carrier tray  
B. Metal latch verification bracket  
C. Tab  
D. Plastic mezzanine lock bars  
134  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Processor Retention Bracket  
See Figure 44.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Carefully align the processor retention bracket guideposts (larger guide on the right) with the  
bracket guides on the profusion carrier tray.  
3. Ensure that all the guides for each mezzanine board are properly aligned. Lock the plastic  
mezzanine lock bars by squeezing the winged end of the plastic lock bar while simultaneously  
pushing in toward the profusion carrier tray. Lock all four mezzanine lock bars.  
4. Push up and in on the metal latch verification brackets. All four metal latches must be in the  
up position before reinstalling the profusion carrier tray.  
Mezzanine Board(s): Removing and Installing  
Removing the Mezzanine Board(s)  
See Figure 45.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the memory module (page 142).  
3. Remove the profusion carrier tray (page 104).  
4. Remove the processor retention bracket (page 134).  
5. Remove the Mezzanine Extraction Tool/Cache Hold Down from the front of the processor  
retention bracket.  
6. Insert the flange end (without foam) under the edge of the mezzanine board at the place  
marked "insert extraction tool here".  
7. Using the grand connector as a fulcrum, press down on the opposite end of the tool as it lifts  
the rear end of the board.  
8. Set the tool aside and lift on both the front edge and the rear edge of the mezzanine board to  
unseat it from the profusion carrier board.  
Installing the Mezzanine Board(s)  
CAUTION  
Please follow these procedures carefully. The mezzanine board does not  
have a keying feature and can be installed incorrectly.  
1. Prior to seating the mezzanine board onto the connector, orient the board so that the white  
alignment marker on the board (lower right corner) is aligned with the white alignment arrow  
located on the profusion carrier. The white number label will be on the left size of the  
mezzanine board.  
2. Look under the board to ensure that it is properly aligned with the profusion carrier, and not  
improperly aligned with components or processor slots.  
3. Push down firmly in the middle area of the mezzanine board until it’s flush with the profusion  
carrier.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Profusion Carrier: Removing and Installing  
Removing the Profusion Carrier  
See Figure 45.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the memory module (page 142).  
3. Remove the cache coherency filters (page 132).  
4. Remove the profusion carrier tray (page 104).  
5. Remove the processor retention bracket (page 134).  
6. Remove the mezzanine board(s) (page 135).  
7. Remove the front panel controller board (page 106).  
8. Remove the screws in the base of the S.E.C. cartridge guides.  
9. Remove the cartridge guides—they come out as one unit—and set them aside.  
10. Remove the screws securing the profusion carrier to the chassis.  
11. Lift the profusion carrier to unsnap it from the snap-on standoffs.  
12. Place the carrier on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Installing the Profusion Carrier  
See Figure 45.  
1. Remove the profusion carrier from its protective wrapper.  
2. Position the carrier over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the profusion tray.  
3. Press the carrier onto the snap-on standoffs, and insert the screws loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
4. Position the cartridge guides over the profusion carrier and loosely insert the retaining screws  
into the threaded standoffs.  
5. Make sure the carrier is properly seated, then tighten all screws to 8.0 inch-pounds.  
6. Install the mezzanine board(s) (see page 135).  
7. Install the front panel board.  
8. Install the profusion tray.  
136  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
C
B
D
OM08755  
Figure 45. Separating the Profusion Carrier and Processor Mezzanine Boards  
A. Processor mezzanine board  
B. Profusion carrier  
C. Mezzanine extraction tool/cache hold down  
D. Grand connector  
PHP I/O Carrier: Removing and Installing  
CAUTION  
The PHP I/O carrier can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always requires  
careful handling. After removing the carrier from the server, place it  
component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface to prevent  
shorting out the battery leads. If you place the carrier on a conductive  
surface, the back-up battery leads may short out. If they do, this will result  
in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery. Do not slide the carrier  
over any surface.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the PHP I/O Carrier  
See Figure 46  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the I/O Tray (see “I/O Tray” on page 114).  
3. Remove the I/O riser board (see “I/O Riser Board” on page 111).  
4. Remove the ICMB board (see “Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board” on page 116).  
5. Remove all power switch activators and covers.  
6. Remove and save the screws that attach the PHP I/O carrier to the tray.  
7. Pull the carrier upward and unsnap it from the snap-on standoffs.  
8. Place the carrier on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Installing the PHP I/O Carrier  
See Figure 46.  
1. Remove the PHP I/O carrier from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Position the carrier over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the center bulkhead of the  
chassis.  
3. Press the carrier onto the snap-on standoffs, and insert the screws loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
4. Make sure the carrier is properly seated, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Install the I/O riser board.  
6. Install the ICMB board.  
7. Install the I/O tray.  
Run the SSU, and use the saved configuration file to restore all options to the same settings. For  
information about running this utility, see “Using the System Setup Utility (SSU).  
138  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SW4G1  
ON  
OFF  
OM08749  
Figure 46. PHP I/O Carrier  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Midplane: Removing and Installing  
Removing the Midplane  
See Figure 47.  
CAUTION  
Disconnect EVERYTHING from the midplane before trying to remove it.  
Failure to do so can result in serious damage to the midplane and any  
components still connected to the midplane.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the power supplies (see “Hot-Swapping Power Supplies” on page 88).  
3. Remove the profusion carrier tray (see “Profusion Carrier Tray” on page 104).  
4. Remove the I/O tray (see “I/O Tray” on page 114).  
5. Remove the three screws that attach the upper midplane support bracket to the chassis.  
CAUTION  
As you remove the upper bracket, make sure the edge of the bracket does not  
gouge or slice the ribbon cables that are routed between the bracket and the  
chassis wall.  
6. Remove the upper bracket by pulling it straight up, out of the chassis.  
7. Remove the four screws that attach the lower bracket/midplane assembly to the chassis.  
8. Remove the bracket/midplane assembly by pulling it straight up, out of the chassis.  
9. To remove the midplane from its support bracket, remove and save the seven screws that  
attach the two parts.  
10. Place the midplane on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Installing the Midplane  
See Figure 47.  
1. Remove the midplane from its protective wrapper.  
2. Position the midplane on its support bracket and insert the screws loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
3. Make sure the midplane is properly positioned, then tighten all screws firmly  
(8.0 inch-pounds).  
4. Install the midplane/support bracket assembly in the chassis, then secure it with the four  
screws you removed earlier.  
140  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
The UPPER midplane support bracket has a number of slots that mate with  
rectangular tabs on the top of the midplane.  
5. Install the upper midplane support bracket, then secure it with the three screws you removed  
earlier.  
6. Install the I/O tray.  
7. Install the profusion carrier tray.  
8. Install power supplies.  
A
B
C
D
OM07504  
Figure 47. Midplane  
A. Grand connector  
B. Memory module connector  
C. Peripheral power connector  
D. Memory module connector  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Modules and DIMMs: Removing and  
Installing  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the memory module DIMM sockets, do not attempt to  
use the metal stiffener on the memory module as a handle.  
Removing a Memory Module  
See Figure 48.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the memory module cover (A) (see “Removing the Memory Module Cover” on  
page 100).  
3. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the memory module outward about 90° to  
disengage the pin-and-socket connector of the module from the pin-and-socket connector of  
the midplane.  
CAUTION: Support Memory Module During Removal  
Support the entire length of the memory module as you slide it out of the  
chassis. The module is more than 12 inches long and could be damaged if  
you allow it to bend by supporting only one end.  
4. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, slide it out of the slot  
guides.  
5. Place the module DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an  
antistatic protective wrapper.  
Installing a Memory Module  
See Figure 48.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, remove it from its  
protective wrapper. Place the module DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
3. Record the serial number of the memory module in your equipment log (page 197).  
4. Remove any installed DIMMs from the module you removed earlier. Install them in the new  
memory module.  
NOTE  
Install the memory module DIMM-side down.  
142  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Grasp the memory module by the sides and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the  
levers engage with the flanges in front of the guides.  
6. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat  
the connector of the module in the connector of the midplane.  
7. If you removed the LCD module, reinstall it.  
8. Reinstall the memory module cover.  
A
OM10703  
Figure 48. Removing a Memory Module  
A. Memory Module Cover  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing DIMMs  
CAUTION  
Use extreme care when removing a DIMM. Too much pressure can damage  
the socket slot. Apply only enough pressure on the plastic ejector levers to  
release the DIMM.  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove each memory module and place it component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free  
surface (see “Removing a Memory Module” on page 142).  
3. Gently push the plastic ejector levers out and down to eject a DIMM from its socket.  
4. Hold the DIMM only by its edges, being careful not to touch its components or gold edge  
connectors. Carefully lift it away from the socket and store it in an antistatic package.  
5. Repeat to remove other DIMMs as necessary.  
If you are REPLACING DIMMs, proceed to “Installing DIMMs” on page 145.  
If you are simply REMOVING DIMMs, continue the procedure with the following steps.  
6. Reinstall the memory module.  
7. Run the SSU/BIOS Setup to configure the system and to properly set up advanced memory  
attributes as required.  
144  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing DIMMs  
CAUTIONS  
Use extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying too much pressure can  
damage the socket. DIMMs are keyed and can be inserted in only one way.  
Mixing dissimilar metals might cause memory failures later, resulting in  
data corruption. Install DIMMs with gold-plated edge connectors only in  
gold-plated sockets.  
NOTE  
DIMM slots on the memory module must be installed only in certain  
configurations. See “Memory Overview” on page 25 and Figure 49 on  
page 145 for requirements.  
J1  
J2  
J3  
J4  
J5  
J6  
J7  
J8  
J9  
J10  
J11  
J12  
J13  
J14  
J15  
J16  
OM10690  
Figure 49. DIMMs Slot Layout  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See Figure 50.  
1. Holding the DIMM only by its edges, remove it from its antistatic package.  
2. Orient the DIMM so that the two notches in the bottom edge of the DIMM align with the  
keyed socket on the memory module.  
3. Insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket, then press down firmly on the DIMM  
until it seats correctly.  
4. Gently push the plastic ejector levers on the socket ends to the upright position.  
5. Repeat the steps to install each DIMM.  
6. Reinstall the memory module.  
7. Run the SSU to configure the system and to properly attribute ECC memory.  
OM07320  
Figure 50. Installing DIMMs  
146  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Processors: Removing and Installing  
The profusion carrier supports two processor mezzanine boards. Each mezzanine board provides  
four Slot 2 connectors for Pentium III Xeon processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges.  
Unpopulated Slot 2 connectors require front side bus (FSB) termination boards. When removing  
and installing processors, read the sections “Front Side Bus (FSB) Termination Board Assembly”  
on page 150.  
CAUTION  
The processors can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful  
handling. After removing a processor from a protective wrapper or from a  
mezzanine board, place it on a nonconductive, static-free surface. Do not  
slide the processor over any surface.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a Processor  
See Figure 51 (page 148) and Figure 52 (page 149).  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
3. Remove the processor holddown and set it aside.  
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the processor cartridge outward to eject the  
cartridge out of the Slot 2 connector on the mezzanine board.  
5. Slide the cartridge out of the processor retention bracket slot guides, and place it heat sink-side  
up on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper.  
CAUTION  
If a Slot 2 connector is depopulated, a termination module must be installed  
in the connector to properly terminate the signals on the FSB. See “Front  
Side Bus (FSB) Termination Board Assemblyon page 150.  
A
B
OM10695  
Figure 51. Removing a Processor Holddown  
A. Processor holddown hook end  
B. Captive screw  
148  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a Processor  
See Figure 51 (page 148) and Figure 52 (page 149).  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. To access the processor mezzanine board(s), follow the steps in “Removing a Processor” on  
page 148.  
3. Being careful not to touch the gold edge connector on the processor cartridge, remove it from  
the protective wrapper. Place the cartridge with the heatsink-side up on a nonconductive,  
static-free surface.  
4. Record the serial number of the cartridge in your equipment log (page 197).  
5. Install processors sequentially beginning with the connector marked Processor 1 on the  
mezzanine board.  
6. Grasp the cartridge by the eject/insert levers, (A) and carefully slide it into the slot guides of  
the processor retention bracket until the processor stops.  
7. To seat the cartridge in the mezzanine board connector, push down on the levers  
simultaneously, making sure that the lever locks (B) engage with the slots of the processor  
retention bracket flange (C).  
8. Insert the hook end of the holddown bracket in the flange of the processor retention bracket.  
9. Reinstall the holddown securing screw.  
10. Reinstall the top cover.  
A
B
C
OM10693  
Figure 52. Installing a Processor  
A. Eject/insert levers  
B. Lever locks  
C. Slot in processor retention bracket flange  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Side Bus (FSB) Termination Board Assembly  
The profusion carrier provides connectors for two processor mezzanine boards. Each board  
provides four Slot 2 connectors for Pentium III Xeon processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges. If  
any Slot 2 connector is depopulated, a termination board assembly must be installed in the  
connector to properly terminate the signals on the FSB.  
For example, if only two slots in a mezzanine board are populated with processors, you need  
FSB termination board assemblies in the two unpopulated processor slots.  
The assembly is a termination board packaged in plastic housing.  
Removing a Termination Board  
See Figure 53.  
1. Observe the safety precautions, warnings, and cautions at the beginning of this chapter.  
2. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the Top Cover” on page 98).  
3. Remove the processor holddown bracket and set it aside.  
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the terminator module outward to eject the  
module out of the Slot 2 connector.  
5. Slide the module out of the processor retention bracket slot guides, and place it component-  
side down on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
150  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a Termination Board  
See Figure 53.  
1. Grasp the terminator board by the eject/insert levers, (A) and carefully slide it into the slot  
guides of the processor retention bracket until the board stops.  
2. To seat the board in the mezzanine board connector, push down on the levers simultaneously,  
making sure that the lever locks (B) engage with the slots of the processor retention bracket  
flange (C).  
3. Insert the hook end of the holddown bracket in the flange of the processor retention bracket.  
4. Insert the screws you removed earlier and tighten them firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Install the top cover.  
B
A
C
OM10694  
Figure 53. Installing a Termination Board Assembly  
A. Eject/insert levers  
B. Lever locks  
C. Slot in processor retention bracket  
flange  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Backup Battery  
The lithium battery on the I/O carrier powers the real-time clock (RTC) for three to four years in  
the absence of power. When the battery weakens, it loses voltage and the system settings stored in  
CMOS RAM in the RTC (e.g., the date and time) can be wrong. Contact your customer service  
representative or dealer for a list of approved devices.  
WARNING  
If the system has been running, any installed processor and heat sink on  
the processor board(s) will be hot. To avoid the possibility of a burn, be  
careful when removing or installing components that are located near  
processors.  
The following warning and translations are required by specific certifying agencies to be printed  
immediately adjacent to the procedure for removing the RTC.  
WARNING  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with  
the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment  
manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
ADVARSEL!  
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning  
må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte  
batteri tilbage til leverandøren.  
ADVARSEL  
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare. Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri  
som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukt batteri returneres  
apparatleverandøren.  
VARNING  
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller  
en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera  
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.  
VAROITUS  
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo  
ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty  
paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.  
152  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
3
A
B
C
1
OM11018  
Figure 54. Replacing the Lithium Battery  
A. Tab  
B. Positive-side up  
C. Battery  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of this chapter and the additional  
warning given on page 152.  
2. Remove the top cover.  
3. Insert the tip of a small flat-bladed screwdriver or equivalent under the plastic tab on the  
snap-on plastic retainer (1).  
4. Gently push down on the screwdriver to lift the battery (2).  
5. Remove the battery from its socket (3).  
6. Dispose of the battery according to local ordinance.  
7. Remove the new lithium battery from its package and, being careful to observe the correct  
polarity, insert it in the battery socket.  
8. Reinstall the top cover using the original screws.  
9. Run the SSU to restore the configuration settings to the RTC.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Upgrading Boardset Components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Solving Problems  
This chapter helps you identify and solve problems that might occur while you are using the  
system.  
Resetting the System  
To do this:  
Press:  
Soft boot reset, which clears system memory and reloads the operating system.  
Clear system memory, restart POST, and reload the operating system.  
<Ctrl+Alt+Del>  
Reset button  
Power off/on  
Cold boot reset, which clears system memory, restarts POST, reloads the  
operating system, and halts power to all peripherals.  
Initial System Startup  
Problems that occur at initial system startup are usually caused by incorrect installation or  
configuration. Hardware failure is a less frequent cause.  
Checklist  
Are all cables and boards correctly connected and secured?  
Are the processors and termination boards fully seated in their slots on the mezzanine  
board(s)?  
Is at least one memory board installed and fully seated?  
Are all add-in PCI boards fully seated in their slots on the I/O carrier?  
Are all switch and jumper settings on boards and drives correct?  
Are all switch and jumper settings on add-in boards and peripheral devices correct? To check  
these settings, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation that comes with them. If applicable,  
ensure that there are no conflicts—for example, two add-in boards sharing the same interrupt.  
Are all DIMMs installed correctly?  
Are all peripheral devices installed correctly?  
Is the hard disk drive properly formatted or configured?  
Are all device drivers properly installed?  
Are the configuration settings made with the SSU correct?  
Is the OS properly loaded? Refer to the OS documentation.  
Did you press the system power on/off switch on the front panel to turn the server on  
(power-on light should be lit)?  
Are the system power cords properly connected to the system and plugged into a NEMA  
6-15R outlet for 200-240 V?  
Is AC power available at the wall outlet?  
If these items are correct but the problem recurs, see “More Problem-Solving Procedures” on  
page 157.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Running New Application Software  
Problems that occur when you run new application software are usually related to the software.  
Faulty equipment is much less likely, especially if other software runs correctly.  
Checklist  
Does the system meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software? See the software  
documentation.  
Is the software an authorized copy? If not, get one; unauthorized copies often do not work.  
If you are running the software from a diskette, is it a good copy?  
If you are running the software from a CD-ROM disk, is the disk scratched or dirty?  
If you are running the software from a hard disk drive, is the software correctly installed?  
Were all necessary procedures followed and files installed?  
Are the correct device drivers installed?  
Is the software correctly configured for the system?  
Are you using the software correctly?  
If the problems persist, contact the software vendor’s customer service representative.  
After the System Has Been Running Correctly  
Problems that occur after the system hardware and software have been running correctly often  
indicate equipment failure. Many situations that are easy to correct, however, can also cause such  
problems; sometimes the problem stems from changes made to the system, such as hardware or  
software that has been added or removed.  
Checklist  
If you are running the software from a diskette, try a new copy of the software.  
If you are running the software from a CD-ROM disk, try a different disk to see if the problem  
occurs on all disks.  
If you are running the software from a hard disk drive, try running it from a diskette. If the  
software runs correctly, there might be a problem with the copy on the hard disk drive.  
Reinstall the software on the hard disk, and try running it again. Make sure all necessary files  
are installed.  
If the problems are intermittent, there may be a loose cable, dirt in the keyboard (if keyboard  
input is incorrect), a marginal power supply, or other random component failures.  
If you suspect that a transient voltage spike, power outage, or brownout might have occurred,  
reload the software and try running it again. (Symptoms of voltage spikes include a flickering  
video display, unexpected system reboots, and the system not responding to user commands.)  
NOTE  
Random errors in data files: If you are getting random errors in your data  
files, they may be getting corrupted by voltage spikes on your power line. If  
you are experiencing any of the above symptoms that might indicate voltage  
spikes on the power line, you might want to install a surge suppressor  
between the power outlet and the system power cords.  
156  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More Problem-Solving Procedures  
This section provides a more detailed approach to identifying a problem and locating its source.  
Preparing the System for Diagnostic Testing  
CAUTION  
Turn off devices before disconnecting cables: Before disconnecting any  
peripheral cables from the system, turn off the system and any external  
peripheral devices. Failure to do so can cause permanent damage to the  
system and/or the peripheral devices.  
1. Turn off the system and all external peripheral devices. Disconnect all of them from the  
system, except the keyboard and video monitor.  
2. Make sure the system power cords are plugged into a properly grounded AC outlet.  
3. Make sure your video display monitor and keyboard are correctly connected to the system.  
Turn on the video monitor. Set its brightness and contrast controls to at least two-thirds of  
their maximum ranges (see the documentation supplied with your video display monitor).  
4. If the operating system normally loads from the hard disk drive, make sure there is no diskette  
in drive A. Otherwise, place a diskette containing the operating system files in drive A.  
5. Turn on the system. If the power LED does not light, see “Power Light Does Not Light” on  
page 159.  
Using PCDiagnostics  
A diagnostics package for the system is contained on the configuration software CD-ROM that  
comes with the system. For documentation about the test modules, see the Diagnostic help disks  
that end with the extension .HLP. They are ASCII files that you can print to form a manual of all  
tests in this product.  
The program called Testview uses a simple DOS-based menu system.  
The program called T.EXE is a noninteractive test executable used to run test program  
modules from DOS batch files.  
The README.TXT file for diagnostics tells how to install the program.  
CAUTION  
Read help information for a test before running it: the diagnostic  
package contains many optional tests that should be used only by a user with  
advanced technical knowledge. Inadvertent actions could be damaging, such  
as running a hard drive write test on a hard disk. All tests that require  
external hardware, user interaction, or are destructive, are disabled in the  
default configurations. Before using such a test, make sure you read and  
understand the help information for that test.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring POST  
See Chapter 3, “Configuration Software and Utilities,” beginning on page 33.  
Verifying Proper Operation of Key System Lights  
As POST determines the system configuration, it tests for the presence of each mass-storage  
device installed in the system. As each device is checked, its activity light should turn on briefly.  
Check for the following:  
Does the diskette drive activity light turn on briefly? If not, see “Diskette Drive Activity Light  
Does Not Light” on page 160.  
If a second diskette drive is installed, does its activity light turn on briefly? If not, see  
“Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light” on page 160.  
If there is a hard disk drive or SCSI device installed in the system, does the hard disk drive  
activity light on the control panel turn on briefly? If not, see “Hard Disk Drive Activity Light  
Does Not Light” on page 161.  
Confirming Loading of the Operating System  
Once the system boots up, the operating system prompt appears on the screen. The prompt varies  
according to the operating system. If the operating system prompt does not appear, see “Initial  
System Startup” on page 155.  
Specific Problems and Corrective Actions  
This section provides possible solutions for these specific problems:  
Power light does not light.  
No beep or incorrect beep pattern.  
No characters appear on screen.  
Characters on the screen appear distorted or incorrect.  
System cooling fans do not rotate.  
Diskette drive activity light does not light.  
Hard disk drive activity light does not light.  
CD-ROM drive activity light does not light.  
Problems with application software.  
The startup prompt “Press <F2> key if you want to run Setup” does not appear on the screen.  
The bootable CD-ROM is not detected.  
Try the solutions in the order given. If you cannot correct the problem, contact your service  
representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
158  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Light Does Not Light  
Check the following:  
Are all the power supplies plugged in? Is the power turned on to the outlet? Is there a blown  
fuse or breaker?  
Is the system connected to a 208 VAC source?  
Is the system operating normally? If so, the power LED is probably defective or the cable  
from the front panel to the I/O carrier is loose.  
Are there other problems with the system? If so, check the items listed under “System Cooling  
Fans Do Not Rotate Properly” on page 160.  
If all items are correct and problems persist, contact your service representative or authorized  
dealer for assistance.  
No Beep Codes  
If the system operates normally, but there was no beep, the speaker might be defective. If the  
speaker is enabled, but the speaker does not function, contact your service representative or  
authorized dealer for assistance.  
Record the beep code emitted by POST, and see “Error and Informational Messages” on page 162.  
No Characters Appear on Screen  
Check the following:  
Is the keyboard working? Check to see that the “Num Lock” light is functioning.  
Is the video monitor plugged in and turned on? Many modern video monitors shut down when  
inactive and may require a moment to warm up when activated.  
Are the brightness and contrast controls on the video monitor properly adjusted?  
Are the video monitor switch settings correct?  
Is the video monitor signal cable properly installed?  
Is the onboard video controller enabled?  
If you are using an add-in video controller board, do the following:  
1. Verify that the video controller board is fully seated in the I/O carrier connector (and verify  
that the video monitor is plugged in to the ACTIVE video controller).  
2. Reboot the system for changes to take effect.  
3. If there are still no characters on the screen after rebooting the system and POST emits a beep  
code, write down the beep code you hear. This information is useful for your service  
representative. See “POST Codes and Countdown Codes” on page 163.  
4. If you do not receive a beep code and characters do not appear, the video display monitor or  
video controller may have failed. You can verify this by trying the monitor on another system  
or trying a different monitor on this system. Contact your service representative or authorized  
dealer for assistance.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect  
Check the following:  
Are the brightness and contrast controls properly adjusted on the video monitor? See the  
manufacturer’s documentation.  
Are the video monitor signal and power cables properly installed?  
Is the correct monitor/video board installed for your operating system?  
If the problem persists, the video monitor may be faulty or it may be the incorrect type.  
Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
System Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly  
If the system cooling fans are not operating properly, system components could be damaged.  
Check the following:  
Is AC power available at the wall outlet?  
Are the system power cords properly connected to the system and the wall outlet?  
Did you press the power on/off push-button switch?  
Is the power-on light lit?  
Have any of the fan motors stopped (use the server management subsystem to check the fan  
status)?  
Are the fan power connectors properly connected to the front panel?  
Are there any shorted/open wires caused by pinched cables or power connector plugs forced  
incorrectly into sockets?  
If the switches and connections are correct and AC power is available at the wall outlet,  
contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light  
Check the following:  
Are the diskette drive power and signal cables properly installed?  
Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the diskette drive set correctly?  
Is the diskette drive properly configured?  
Is the diskette drive activity light always on? If so, the signal cable may be plugged in  
incorrectly.  
If you are using the onboard diskette controller, use the SSU to make sure that “Onboard  
Floppy” is set to “Enabled. ” If you are using an add-in diskette controller, make sure that  
“Onboard Floppy” is set to “Disabled.” To run the SSU, see Chapter 3, starting on page 33.  
If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the diskette drive, I/O carrier, or drive  
signal cable. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
160  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light  
If you have installed one or more hard disk drives in your system, check the following:  
Are the power and signal cables to the drive properly installed?  
Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the hard drive and adapter board set correctly?  
Is the onboard IDE controller enabled? (IDE hard drives only)?  
Is the hard disk drive properly configured?  
NOTE  
Front panel hard disk LED indicates IDE and SCSI devices: The hard  
disk drive activity light on the front panel lights when either an IDE hard  
disk drive, or a SCSI device controlled by the onboard SCSI host controller,  
is in use. This LED does not display CD-ROM activity.  
CD-ROM Drive Activity Light Does Not Light  
Check the following:  
Are the power and signal cables to the CD-ROM drive properly installed?  
Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the drive set correctly?  
Is the drive properly configured?  
Is the onboard IDE controller enabled?  
NOTE  
Front panel hard disk LED indicates IDE and SCSI devices: The hard  
disk drive activity light on the front panel lights when either an IDE hard  
disk drive, or a SCSI device controlled by the onboard SCSI host controller,  
is in use. This LED does not display CD-ROM activity.  
Network Problems  
If you have network problems, consult the documentation that came with the network board you  
purchased for this server.  
PCI Installation Tips  
Some common PCI tips are listed here.  
Certain drivers may require interrupts that are not shared with other PCI drivers. The SSU can  
be used to adjust the interrupt numbers for PCI devices. For certain drivers, it may be  
necessary to alter settings so that interrupts are not shared.  
Check PCI interrupt interdependencies among slots and onboard devices.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problems with Application Software  
If you have problems with application software, do the following:  
Verify that the software is properly configured for the system. See the software installation  
and operation documentation for instructions on setting up and using the software.  
Try a different copy of the software to see if the problem is with the copy you are using.  
Make sure all cables are installed correctly.  
Verify that the I/O carrier switches are set correctly. See “Configuration Switches” on  
page 182.  
If other software runs correctly on the system, contact your vendor about the failing software.  
If the problem persists, contact the software vendor’s customer service representative for  
assistance.  
Bootable CD-ROM Is Not Detected  
Check the following:  
Is BIOS set to allow the CD-ROM to be the first bootable device?  
Is the peripheral bay fully seated against the chassis?  
Error and Informational Messages  
When you turn on the system, POST displays messages that provide information about the system.  
If a failure occurs, POST emits beep codes that indicate errors in hardware, software, or firmware.  
If POST can display a message on the video display screen, it causes the speaker to beep twice as  
the message appears.  
162  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POST Codes and Countdown Codes  
BIOS indicates the current testing phase during POST after the video adapter has been successfully  
initialized by outputting a 2-digit hex code to I/O location 80h. To view POST codes, you must  
install an optional PCI POST add-in board. For more information, contact your customer-service  
representative.  
Table 16. Port-80 Codes  
POST Code Beeps  
Error  
02  
03  
04  
06  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Verify Real Mode  
Disable NMI  
Get Processor type  
Initialize system hardware  
Initialize chip set registers with initial POST values  
Set in POST flag  
Initialize processor registers  
Enable processor cache  
Initialize caches to initial POST values  
Initialize I/O  
Initialize the local bus IDE  
Initialize Power Management  
Load alternate registers with initial POST values new  
Restore processor control word during warm boot  
Reset PCI bus masters  
Initialize keyboard controller  
BIOS ROM checksum  
16  
17  
18  
1A  
1C  
20  
22  
24  
28  
29  
2A  
2C  
2E  
2F  
30  
32  
33  
34  
1-2-2-3  
Prepare to size RAM  
8254 timer initialization  
8237 DMA controller initialization  
Reset Programmable Interrupt Controller  
Test DRAM refresh  
1-3-1-1  
1-3-1-3  
Test 8742 Keyboard Controller  
Set ES segment register to 4 GB  
Autosize DRAM  
1-3-3-1  
1-3-3-2  
Initialize or call POST Memory Manager  
Clear 512 KB base RAM  
1-3-4-1  
1-3-4-3  
RAM failure on address line xxxx  
RAM failure on data bits xxxx of low byte of memory bus  
Prepare to shadow system BIOS  
RAM failure on data bits xxxx of high byte of memory bus  
Test processor bus-clock frequency  
Initialize the POST Dispatch Manager  
Test CMOS  
1-4-1-1  
1-4-2-1  
continued  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 16. Port-80 Codes (continued)  
POST Code Beeps  
Error  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3C  
3D  
40  
42  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4E  
50  
52  
54  
56  
RAMInitialize alternate chip set registers  
Warm start shut down  
Reinitialize the chip set (MB only)  
Shadow system BIOS ROM  
Reinitialize the cache (MB only)  
Autosize cache  
Configure advanced chip set registers  
Load alternate registers with CMOS values new  
Set Initial processor speed new  
Initialize interrupt vectors  
Initialize BIOS interrupts  
Initialize run-time devices  
Check ROM copyright notice  
Initialize manager for PCI Option ROMs  
Check video configuration against CMOS  
Initialize PCI bus and devices  
Initialize all video adapters in system  
Display QuietBoot screen  
Shadow video BIOS ROM  
Display copyright notice  
Display processor type and speed  
Test keyboard  
Set key click if enabled  
Enable keyboard  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
60  
62  
64  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
2-2-3-1  
Test for unexpected interrupts  
Initialize POST Display Service  
Display prompt "Press F2 to enter SETUP"  
Disable cache  
Test RAM between 512 and 640k  
Test extended memory  
Test extended memory address lines  
Jump to UserPatch1  
Configure advanced cache registers  
Initialize processors  
Enable external and processor caches  
Setup power management  
Display external cache size  
continued  
164  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 16. Port-80 Codes (continued)  
POST Code Beeps  
Error  
6B  
6C  
6E  
70  
72  
74  
76  
7A  
7C  
7E  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8F  
Load custom defaults  
Display shadow message  
Display nondisposable segments  
Display error messages  
Check for configuration errors  
Test real-time clock  
Check for keyboard errors  
Test for key lock on  
Set up hardware interrupt vectors  
Test coprocessor if present  
Detect and install external RS232 ports  
Initialize run-time devices  
Detect and install external parallel ports  
Configure IDE controller  
Initialize parallel port  
Initialize PC-compatible PnP ISA devices  
Re-initialize embedded I/O ports  
Initialize embedded configurable devices  
Initialize BIOS Data Area  
Enable NMI  
Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area  
Initialize mouse  
Initialize floppy controller  
Preinitialize local-bus hard-disk controller  
Initialize hard-disk controller or failure during MultiBoot Allocation  
Initialize local-bus hard-disk controller  
Jump to UserPatch2  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
9A  
9C  
9D  
9E  
3-2-1-1  
Build MPTABLE  
Disable A20 address line  
Install CD-ROM for boot  
Clear huge ES segment register  
Fixup MPTABLE  
1-2  
Search for option ROMs. One long and two short beeps on checksum failure  
Shadow option ROMs  
Set up Power Management  
Initialize security  
Enable hardware interrupts  
continued  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 16. Port-80 Codes (continued)  
POST Code Beeps  
Error  
9F  
A0  
A2  
A4  
A8  
AA  
AC  
AE  
B0  
B2  
Initialize local-bus hard-disk controller  
Set time of day  
Check key lock  
Initialize typematic rate  
Erase F2 prompt  
Scan for F2 key stroke  
Enter SETUP  
Clear in-POST flag  
Check for errors  
POST done – prepare to boot operating system  
One short beep before boot  
Display MultiBoot menu  
Check password (optional)  
Initialize ACPI  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
D0  
D2  
D4  
D6  
D8  
DA  
DC  
DE  
DF  
FB  
FC  
FD  
1
Clear global descriptor table  
Prepare to boot  
Initialize DMI  
Clear parity checkers  
Invoke boot menu  
Clear screen (optional)  
Check virus and backup reminders  
Try to boot with INT 19 (Beep code if disabling A20 fails)  
Initialize the POST Error Manager  
Log POST Errors  
4-1-1-1  
Display POST Errors  
Interrupt handler error  
Unknown interrupt error  
Pending interrupt error  
Initialize option ROM error  
Shutdown error  
Extended Block Move  
Shutdown 10 error  
Keyboard controller error  
A20 Error  
4-2-4-4  
FRB in progress  
Five second wait for BMC to initialize  
FRB-2 watch dog timer failed; reset will occur in five seconds  
166  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POST Error Codes and Messages  
The following error codes and messages are representative of various conditions BIOS identifies.  
The exact strings and error numbers may be different from those listed here.  
Table 17. POST Error Codes and Messages  
Code  
0200  
0210  
0211  
0213  
0220  
0230  
0231  
0232  
0250  
0251  
0260  
0270  
0280  
0281  
0297  
02B0  
02B1  
02B2  
02B3  
02D0  
02F0  
02F4  
02F5  
02F6  
02F7  
8108  
8110  
814B  
8150  
8152  
8153  
8160  
Error message  
Failure Fixed Disk  
Stuck Key  
Keyboard error  
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch  
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run SETUP  
System RAM Failed at offset  
Shadow RAM Failed at offset  
Extended RAM Failed at offset  
System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP  
System CMOS checksum bad - Default configuration used  
System timer error  
Real-time clock error  
Previous boot incomplete - default configuration used  
Memory size found by POST differed from EISA CMOS  
Extended memory error  
Diskette drive A error  
Diskette drive B error  
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP  
Incorrect Drive B type - run SETUP  
System cache error - Cache disabled  
CPU ID  
EISA CMOS not writeable  
DMA Test Failed  
Software NMI Failed  
Fail-safe timer NMI failed  
Watchdog Timer failed on last boot  
Server Management Interface filed to function  
BMC in Update Mode  
NVRAM Cleared By Jumper  
ESCD Data Cleared  
Password Cleared By Jumper  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 2 Processor 1  
continued  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 17. POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)  
Code  
8161  
8162  
8163  
8164  
8165  
8166  
8167  
8168  
8169  
816A  
816B  
816C  
816D  
816E  
816F  
8170  
8171  
8172  
8173  
8174  
8175  
8176  
8177  
8180  
8181  
8182  
8200  
8201  
8202  
8203  
8210  
8211  
8212  
8213  
8214  
8215  
8216  
8217  
8220  
8221  
Error message  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 2 Processor 2  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 2 Processor 3  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 2 Processor 4  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 1 Processor 1  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 1 Processor 2  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 1 Processor 3  
Unable to apply BIOS Update for Board 1 Processor 4  
Board 2 Processor 1 L2 cache failed  
Board 2 Processor 2 L2 cache failed  
Board 2 Processor 3 L2 cache failed  
Board 2 Processor 4 L2 cache failed  
Board 1 Processor 1 L2 cache failed  
Board 1 Processor 2 L2 cache failed  
Board 1 Processor 3 L2 cache failed  
Board 1 Processor 4 L2 cache failed  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 2 Processor 1  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 2 Processor 2  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 2 Processor 3  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 2 Processor 4  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 1 Processor 1  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 1 Processor 2  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 1 Processor 3  
BIOS does not support current stepping for Board 1 Processor 4  
PXB 1 Failed to respond  
Mismatch among Processors Detected  
L2 cache size mismatch  
Baseboard management controller failed to function  
Front panel controller failed to function  
Power Share Controller failed to function  
Hotswap Controller failed to function  
Board 2 Processor 1 failed BIST  
Board 2 Processor 2 failed BIST  
Board 2 Processor 3 failed BIST  
Board 2 Processor 4 failed BIST  
Board 1 Processor 1 failed BIST  
Board 1 Processor 2 failed BIST  
Board 1 Processor 3 failed BIST  
Board 1 Processor 4 failed BIST  
Board 2 Processor 1 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 2 Processor 2 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
continued  
168  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 17. POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)  
Code  
8222  
8223  
8224  
8225  
8226  
8227  
8230  
8231  
8232  
8233  
8234  
8235  
8236  
8237  
8240  
8241  
8242  
8243  
8244  
8245  
8246  
8247  
8250  
8251  
8252  
8253  
8254  
8255  
8256  
8257  
8260  
8261  
8262  
8263  
8264  
8265  
Error message  
Board 2 Processor 3 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 2 Processor 4 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 1 Processor 1 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 1 Processor 2 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 1 Processor 3 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 1 Processor 4 Internal Error (IERR) failure  
Board 2 Processor 1 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 2 Processor 2 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 2 Processor 3 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 2 Processor 4 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 1 Processor 1 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 1 Processor 2 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 1 Processor 3 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 1 Processor 4 Thermal Trip failure  
Board 2 Processor 1 disabled  
Board 2 Processor 2 disabled  
Board 2 Processor 3 disabled  
Board 2 Processor 4 disabled  
Board 1 Processor 1 disabled  
Board 1 Processor 2 disabled  
Board 1 Processor 3 disabled  
Board 1 Processor 4 disabled  
Board 2 Processor 1 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 2 Processor 2 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 2 Processor 3 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 2 Processor 4 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 1 Processor 1 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 1 Processor 2 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 1 Processor 3 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 1 Processor 4 failed FRB Level 3 timer  
Board 2 Processor 1 failed initialization  
Board 2 Processor 2 failed initialization  
Board 2 Processor 3 failed initialization  
Board 2 Processor 4 failed initialization  
Board 1 Processor 1 failed initialization  
Board 1 Processor 2 failed initialization  
8266  
8267  
8270  
8270  
8280  
8281  
8290  
8291  
Board 1 Processor 3 failed initialization  
Board 1 Processor 4 failed initialization  
Memory Module 1 failed  
Memory Module 2 failed  
Coherency Filter failed left data test  
Coherency Filter failed right data test  
Coherency Filter failed left address test  
Coherency Filter failed right address test  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Solving Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Technical Reference  
This section includes:  
Connector pinouts and boardset locations  
Information on jumpers  
System I/O addresses  
System memory map addresses  
Interrupts  
Video modes  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
A
B
G
C
D
E
F
OM10941  
Figure 55. Profusion Carrier Layout  
A. Front panel connector  
B. Connector for processor mezzanine board (primary)  
C. Board configuration jumper block  
D. Tag DIMM sockets  
E. System JTAG connector  
F. Connector for processor mezzanine board (secondary)  
G. Grand connector (connects to midplane)  
172  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
B
C
D
J
I
E
H
G
F
OM10940  
Figure 56. I/O Carrier Layout  
A. IDE and diskette connectors  
B. PHP LED/switch connector  
C. USB connector  
D. I/O riser board connector  
E. PCI add-in board slots (ten)  
F. Lithium battery  
G. Configuration switch SW4G1  
H. Server management feature connector (SFC)  
I. Grand connector (connects to midplane)  
J. SCSI A and B connectors  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diskette Drive  
33  
34  
1
2
OM08030  
Table 18. Diskette Drive Connector Pinout  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Signal  
GND  
FD_DIR_L  
GND  
2
FD_DENSEL  
GND  
3
FD_STEP_L  
GND  
4
N/C  
5
Key  
FD_WDATA_L  
GND  
6
FD_DRATE0  
GND  
7
FD_WGATE_L  
GND  
8
FD_INDEX_L  
GND  
9
FD_TRK0_L  
FD_MSEN0  
FD_WPROT_L  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
FD_MTR0_L  
GND  
FD_DR1_L  
GND  
FD_RDATA_L  
GND  
FD_DR0_L  
GND  
FD_HDSEL_L  
GND  
FD_MTR1_L  
FD_MSEN1  
FD_DSKCHG_L  
174  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IRMC Connector  
2
1
26  
23  
OM08032  
Table 19. Intel Remote Management Card  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Description  
SMI_L  
System Management Interrupt  
2
I2C_BACKUP_SCL  
GND  
3
Ground  
4
Reserved  
N/A  
5
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L  
I2C_BACKUP_SDA  
VCC_STDBY  
KEYLOCK_FROM_SFC_L  
NMI_5V  
Host power supply on/off control  
6
7
8
Keyboard lock signal  
9
Nonmaskable interrupt indication  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
VCC3  
3.3V power supply status input  
RST_SFC_L  
GND  
Baseboard reset signal from Server Monitor Module  
Ground  
GND  
Ground  
Reserved  
N/A  
SECURE_MODE_BMC  
GND  
Secure mode indication  
Ground  
INSTRUSION_L  
SMM_NMI_L  
INIT_L  
GND  
Ground  
KB_DATA  
MS_DATA  
KB_CLK  
MS_CLK  
Key pin (N/C)  
RESET_BMC_OC_L  
Connector key  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VGA Video Port  
5
1
10  
6
OM04417  
15  
11  
Table 20. Video Port Connector Pinout  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Red  
Pin  
9
Signal  
N/C  
2
Green  
Blue  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GND  
3
NC  
4
N/C  
DDCDAT  
HSYNC  
VSYNC  
DDCCLK  
5
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
6
7
8
Keyboard and Mouse  
5
6
4
3
2
1
OM11313  
The PS/2-compatible connectors share a common housing; they are functionally equivalent.  
Table 21. Keyboard and Mouse Connector Pinouts  
Pin  
1
Keyboard signal  
Pin  
1
Mouse signal  
MSEDAT  
NC  
KEYDAT  
2
NC  
2
3
GND  
3
GND  
4
FUSED_VCC (+5 V)  
4
FUSED_VCC (+5 V)  
MSECLK  
NC  
5
KEYCLK  
NC  
5
6
6
176  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parallel Port  
13  
1
OM11312  
25  
14  
Table 22. Parallel Port Connector Pinout  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
10  
Signal  
ACK_L  
Busy  
STROBE_L  
Data bit 0  
Data bit 1  
Data bit 2  
Data bit 3  
Data bit 4  
Data bit 5  
Data bit 6  
Data bit 7  
2
11  
3
12  
PE  
4
13  
SLCT  
5
14  
AUFDXT_L  
ERROR_L  
INIT_L  
SLCTIN_L  
GND  
6
15  
7
16  
8
17  
9
1825  
Serial Ports A and B  
1
5
OM11311  
6
9
Table 23. Serial Port Connector Pinout  
Pin  
1
Signal  
DCD  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RIA  
Description  
Data carrier detected  
Receive data  
2
3
Transmit data  
4
Data terminal ready  
Ground  
5
6
Data set ready  
Request to send  
Clear to send  
7
8
9
Ring indication active  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Universal Serial Bus (USB)  
The SRPL8 server provides two external USB connectors at the back panel. Table 24 lists the  
pinout for each connector.  
4
1
OM08036  
Table 24. USB Connector Pinout  
Pin  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
Signal  
VCC  
Notes  
Over current monitor line port 0  
Differential data line paired with DATAH0  
Differential data line paired with DATAL0  
Cable ground  
DataL0  
DataH0  
GND  
VCC  
Over current monitor line port 1  
Differential data line paired with DATAH1  
Differential data line paired with DATAl1  
Cable ground  
DATAL1  
DATAH1  
GND  
SCSI  
34  
68  
1
35  
OM08027  
Table 25. Wide SCSI Connector Pinout  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1-16  
17  
GND  
49-50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
GND  
TERMPWR  
TERMPWR  
Reserved  
GND  
TERMPWR  
TERMPWR  
Reserved  
GND  
18  
19  
20-34  
35  
DB12_L  
DB13_L  
DB14_L  
DB15_L  
DBP1_L  
DB0_L  
ATN_L  
GND  
36  
37  
BSY_L  
ACK_L  
RST_L  
MSG_L  
SEL_L  
C/D_L  
38  
39  
40  
41  
DB1_L  
42  
DB2_L  
43  
DB3_L  
REQ_L  
I/O_L  
44  
DB4_L  
45  
DB5_L  
DB8_L  
DB9_L  
DB10_L  
DB11_L  
46  
DB6_L  
47  
DB7_L  
48  
DBP _L  
178  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IDE  
39  
40  
1
2
OM08029  
Table 26. IDE Connector Pinout  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
RSTDRV  
GND  
DD7  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
DRQ  
2
GND  
3
DIOW  
4
DD8  
GND  
5
DD6  
DIOR  
6
DD9  
GND  
7
DD5  
IORDY  
CSEL (1 Kp/d)  
DACK  
8
DD10  
DD4  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
DD11  
DD3  
GND  
IRQ  
DD12  
DD2  
Reserved (N/C)  
DA1  
DD13  
DD1  
Reserved (N/C)  
DA0  
DD14  
DD0  
DA2  
CS1P_L  
DS3P_L  
DHACT_L  
GND  
DD15  
GND  
Keyed  
If no IDE drives are present, no IDE cable should be connected. If only one IDE drive is installed,  
it must be connected at the end of the cable.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCI  
Table 27. 33MHz, 64-bit PCI Connectors (Slots A and B)  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
TRST_L  
+12V  
TMS  
TDI  
+5V  
INTA_L  
INTC_L  
+5V  
RESERVED  
+5V  
RESERVED  
GND  
GND  
RESERVED  
RESET_L  
+5V  
GRANT_L  
GND  
RESERVED  
AD30  
+3.3V  
AD28  
AD26  
GND  
AD24  
IDSEL  
+3.3V  
AD22  
AD20  
GND  
AD18  
AD16  
+3.3V  
FRAME_L  
GND  
TRDY_L  
GND  
STOP_L  
+3.3V  
SDONE  
SB0_L  
GND  
PAR  
AD15  
+3.3V  
AD13  
A48  
A49  
A50  
A51  
A52  
A53  
A54  
A55  
A56  
A57  
A58  
A59  
A60  
A61  
A62  
A63  
A64  
A65  
A66  
A67  
A68  
A69  
A70  
A71  
A72  
A73  
A74  
A75  
A76  
A77  
A78  
A79  
A80  
A81  
A82  
A83  
A84  
A85  
A86  
A87  
A88  
A89  
A90  
A91  
A92  
A93  
A94  
GND  
AD9  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
-12V  
TCK  
GND  
TDO  
+5V  
+5V  
INTB_L  
INTD_L  
PRSNT1_L  
RESERVED  
PRSNT2_L  
GND  
GND  
RESERVED  
GND  
CLK  
GND  
REQ_L  
+5V  
AD31  
AD29  
GND  
AD27  
AD25  
+3.3V  
C/BE3_L  
AD23  
GND  
AD21  
AD19  
+3.3V  
AD17  
C/BE2_L  
GND  
IRDY_L  
+3.3V  
DEVSEL_L  
GND  
LOCK_L  
PERR_L  
+3.3V  
SERR_L  
+3.3V  
B48  
B49  
B50  
B51  
B52  
B53  
B54  
B55  
B56  
B57  
B58  
B59  
B60  
B61  
B62  
B63  
B64  
B65  
B66  
B67  
B68  
B69  
B70  
B71  
B72  
B73  
B74  
B75  
B76  
B77  
B78  
B79  
B80  
B81  
B82  
B83  
B84  
B85  
B86  
B87  
B88  
B89  
B90  
B91  
B92  
B93  
B94  
AD10  
M66EN  
5V KEYWAY  
5V KEYWAY  
AD8  
AD7  
+3.3V  
AD5  
AD3  
GND  
AD1  
+5V  
ACK64_L  
+5V  
+5V  
RESERVED  
GND  
C/BE6_L  
C/BE4_L  
GND  
AD63  
AD61  
+5V  
AD59  
AD57  
GND  
AD55  
AD53  
GND  
AD51  
AD49  
+5V  
5V KEYWAY  
5V KEYWAY  
C/BEO_L  
+3.3V  
AD6  
AD4  
GND  
AD2  
AD0  
+5V  
REQ64_L  
+5V  
+5V  
GND  
C/BE7_L  
C/BE5_L  
+5V  
PAR64  
AD62  
GND  
AD60  
AD58  
GND  
AD56  
AD54  
+5V  
AD52  
AD50  
GND  
AD48  
AD46  
GND  
AD44  
AD42  
+5V  
AD40  
AD38  
GND  
AD36  
AD34  
GND  
AD32  
RESERVED  
GND  
A9  
B9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
A37  
A38  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
B37  
B38  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
AD47  
AD45  
GND  
AD43  
AD41  
+5V  
AD39  
AD37  
+5V  
AD35  
AD33  
GND  
C/BE1_L  
AD14  
GND  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
GND  
AD11  
RESERVED  
AD12  
180  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 28. 66MHz, 64-bit PCI Connectors (Slots C and D)  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
TRST_L  
+12V  
TMS  
TDI  
+5V  
INTA_L  
INTC_L  
+5V  
RESERVED  
+3.3V  
A48  
A49  
A50  
A51  
A52  
A53  
A54  
A55  
A56  
A57  
A58  
A59  
A60  
A61  
A62  
A63  
A64  
A65  
A66  
A67  
A68  
A69  
A70  
A71  
A72  
A73  
A74  
A75  
A76  
A77  
A78  
A79  
A80  
A81  
A82  
A83  
A84  
A85  
A86  
A87  
A88  
A89  
A90  
A91  
A92  
A93  
A94  
GND  
AD9  
GND  
GND  
C/BEO_L  
+3.3V  
AD6  
AD4  
GND  
AD2  
AD0  
+ 3.3V  
REQ64_L  
+5V  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
-12V  
TCK  
GND  
TDO  
+5V  
+5V  
INTB_L  
INTD_L  
PRSNT1_L  
RESERVED  
PRSNT2_L  
3.3V Keyway  
B48  
B49  
B50  
B51  
B52  
B53  
B54  
B55  
B56  
B57  
B58  
B59  
B60  
B61  
B62  
B63  
B64  
B65  
B66  
B67  
B68  
B69  
B70  
B71  
B72  
B73  
B74  
B75  
B76  
B77  
B78  
B79  
B80  
B81  
B82  
B83  
B84  
B85  
B86  
B87  
B88  
B89  
B90  
B91  
B92  
B93  
B94  
AD10  
M66EN  
GND  
GND  
AD8  
AD7  
+3.3V  
AD5  
AD3  
GND  
A9  
B9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
A37  
A38  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
B37  
B38  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
RESERVED  
3.3V Keyway  
AD1  
+ 3.3V  
ACK64_L  
+5V  
+5V  
RESERVED  
GND  
RESERVED  
RESET_L  
+3.3V  
GRANT_L  
GND  
RESERVED  
AD30  
+3.3V  
AD28  
AD26  
GND  
AD24  
IDSEL  
+3.3V  
AD22  
AD20  
GND  
AD18  
AD16  
+3.3V  
FRAME_L  
GND  
TRDY_L  
GND  
STOP_L  
+3.3V  
SDONE  
SB0_L  
GND  
PAR  
AD15  
+3.3V  
AD13  
RESERVED  
GND  
CLK  
GND  
REQ_L  
+3.3V  
AD31  
AD29  
GND  
AD27  
AD25  
+3.3V  
C/BE3_L  
AD23  
GND  
AD21  
AD19  
+3.3V  
AD17  
C/BE2_L  
GND  
IRDY_L  
+3.3V  
DEVSEL_L  
GND  
LOCK_L  
PERR_L  
+3.3V  
SERR_L  
+3.3V  
C/BE1_L  
AD14  
GND  
AD12  
+5V  
GND  
C/BE7_L  
C/BE5_L  
+3.3V  
PAR64  
AD62  
GND  
AD60  
AD58  
GND  
AD56  
AD54  
+3.3V  
AD52  
AD50  
GND  
AD48  
AD46  
GND  
AD44  
AD42  
+3.3V  
AD40  
AD38  
GND  
AD36  
AD34  
GND  
C/BE6_L  
C/BE4_L  
GND  
AD63  
AD61  
+3.3V  
AD59  
AD57  
GND  
AD55  
AD53  
GND  
AD51  
AD49  
+3.3V  
AD47  
AD45  
GND  
AD43  
AD41  
+5V  
AD39  
AD37  
+3.3V  
AD35  
AD33  
GND  
AD32  
RESERVED  
GND  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
GND  
AD11  
RESERVED  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Switches  
One header provides eight switches that control various configuration options. Figure 57 shows  
the switches.  
SW4G1  
1
Reserved  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Recovery Boot  
Spare  
BIOS Write Enable  
Clear CMOS  
Password Clear  
PHP Override  
Reserved  
Figure 57. I/O Carrier Configuration Switches  
Table 29. I/O Carrier Switch Summary  
Items in bold show default placement for each configurable option.  
Switch  
Number  
Default  
Setting  
Function  
What it does at system reset  
Reserved  
1
2
Disabled N/A  
Recovery Boot  
Enabled BIOS attempts a recovery boot, loading BIOS code from a  
diskette into the flash device. This is typically used when  
BIOS code has been corrupted.  
Disabled System attempts to boot using BIOS stored in flash memory.  
Disabled N/A  
Spare (Reserved)  
BIOS Update  
3
4
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
No BIOS flash update allowed.  
Allow BIOS flash update.  
CMOS Clear  
5
6
Replaces the contents of NVRAM with the manufacturing  
default settings.  
Disabled Preserves the contents of NVRAM.  
Enabled Clears the current system password.  
Password Clear  
Disabled Maintains the password.  
Disabled N/A  
PHP Override  
Reserved  
7
8
Disabled N/A  
182  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Procedure to Change Switch Settings  
1. Observe the safety and ESD precautions at the beginning of Chapter 5 (page 93).  
2. Turn off all connected peripherals and turn off system power.  
3. Remove the PCI hot-plug cover. You do not need to remove the I/O carrier from the chassis.  
Due to the location of the switch block, an add-in card populated in slot 3 may need to be  
removed.  
4. Refer to Figure 56 on page 173 for Switch SW4G1 location. In the figure, the switch is  
located to the left and slightly below the PCI Slot number 3 on the I/O board. When you are  
looking at the actual system, the board will be turned 90 degrees, and the switch will be  
located to the right and slightly below PCI Slot number 3 on the I/O board. A diagram of the  
switch configuration is also located on the underside of the PCI hot-plug cover.  
5. The switch block is shown with all switches in the open or disabled position by default.  
6. Move the individual switch for the desired setting.  
7. Power on the system for the change to take effect.  
8. Return the switch to itsdefault position after the desired operation is complete.  
CMOS Clear Switch  
1. Ensure that the system is powered off. Remove the PCI hot-plug cover. On switch SW4G1,  
slide or press switch number 5 to the right most position.  
2. Power on the system. Wait for POST to complete and for the messages “NVRAM cleared by  
jumper” and “Press F2 to enter Setup” to appear. This automatically reprograms CMOS to the  
default settings, except for the password.  
3. Enter Setup and make any changes necessary (for example, changing the boot device). Press  
F10 to save the new Setup configuration and exit Setup.  
4. Power off the system.  
5. Return switch position 5 to the left most (default) position.  
6. Reinstall the PCI hot-plug cover using the original screws, power on the system, and resume  
normal operation.  
7. Run BIOS Setup or the SSU to verify the correct settings. See Chapter 3.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Password Clear Switch  
1. Ensure that the system is powered off. Remove the PCI hot-plug cover. On switch SW4G1,  
slide or press switch number 6 to the right most position.  
2. Power on the system. Wait for POST to complete and for the messages “Password cleared by  
jumper” and “Press F2 to enter Setup” to appear. This automatically clears the password.  
3. Enter Setup and make any changes necessary (for example, changing the boot device). Press  
F10 to save the new Setup configuration and exit Setup.  
4. Power off the system.  
5. Return switch position 6 to the left most (default) position.  
6. Reinstall the PCI hot-plug cover using the original screws, power on the system, and resume  
normal operation.  
Recovery Boot Switch  
1. Ensure that the system is powered off. Remove the PCI hot-plug cover. On switch SW4G1,  
slide or press switch number 2 to the right most position.  
2. Ensure that the BIOS diskette is bootable and that all BIOS files to include the recovery file  
are on the diskette. The BIOS recovery file will have a *.recfile extension, for example,  
bios.rec. Insert the BIOS recovery diskette in drive A and then power on the system. After  
the system boots, the speaker emits a single beep and the recovery process begins. This takes  
about three minutes. When the recovery process completes, the speaker emits two beeps.  
While in the recovery mode, there is no screen display on the monitor. The keyboard is disabled as  
the system automatically recovers BIOS. The following beep codes describe the recovery status.  
Beep Code  
Message  
2
4
Successful completion, no errors.  
The system could not boot from the diskette. The diskette may not be bootable.  
Continuous series of  
low beeps  
The wrong BIOS recovery files are being used and/or the recovery switch is in the  
wrong position.  
3. Power off the system.  
4. Return switch position 2 to the left most (default) position.  
5. Reinstall the PCI hot-plug cover using the original screws, remove the diskette from drive A.  
Power on the system, and resume normal operation.  
184  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System I/O Addresses  
Table 30 shows the location in I/O space of all directly I/O-accessible registers.  
Table 30. System I/O Addresses  
I/O Address  
0000 – 001F  
0020 – 0021  
0022 – 0040  
0040 – 005F  
0060 & 0064  
0061  
Resource  
I/O Address  
0170 – 0177  
01F0 – 01F7  
0278 – 027F  
02E8 – 02EF  
02F8 – 02FF  
0370 – 0377  
Resource  
DMA controller  
Secondary IDE controller  
Primary IDE controller  
Parallel port 2 (relocatable)  
Serial port 4 (relocatable)  
Serial port 2 (relocatable)  
Secondary diskette  
Interrupt controller 1  
Unused/reserved  
Programmable timer  
Keyboard controller  
NMI status & control register  
0070  
NMI mask bit and RTC index address 0378 – 037F  
Parallel port 1 (relocatable)  
Parallel port 3  
0071  
RTC  
03BC – 03BF  
03E8 – 03EF  
03F8 – 03FF  
0CF8  
0072  
RTC extended index register  
RTC extended data register  
DMA low page register  
Port 92 register  
Serial port 2 (relocatable)  
Serial port 1 (relocatable)  
PCI config address register  
PCI data address register  
Reset control  
0073  
0080 – 008F  
0092  
0CFC  
00A0 – 00A1  
00B2  
Interrupt controller 2  
0CF9  
Advanced pwr management control  
Advanced power management status  
DMA controller  
04D0 – 04D1  
0C00 – 0C7F  
0CA8 – 0CAF  
INTC edge/level register  
Pwr management base address  
SMIC decoder  
00B3  
00C0-00DF  
00F0  
Coprocessor error  
0CC0 – 0CCF SM base address  
2000 – FFFF Allocated to the PCI devices  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Map  
Table 31 lists the system memory map. When BIOS allocates memory space to PCI devices, it  
starts just below the APICs and continues downward. Assigning memory space to PCI devices  
does not decrease the total available memory in the system because this memory is “reclaimed”  
above 4 GB.  
The server does not support memory gaps from 512 KB to 640 KB and from 15 MB to 16 MB.  
These regions are treated as normal system memory.  
Table 31. Memory Map  
Address Range  
Amount  
640K  
128K  
96K  
Function  
00000000 – 0009FFFF  
000A0000 – 000AFFFF  
000C0000 – 000D7FFF  
000C0000 – 000D7FFF  
000D8000 – 000DBFFF  
Base (conventional) System Memory  
ISA Video buffer  
Add-in Options ROM’s (Video, SCSI…)  
Add-in Options ROM’s  
96K  
16K  
Allocated to Run time user binary if  
enabled/programmed, otherwise can be used for options  
ROM’s  
000DC000 – 000DFFFF  
000E0000 – 000FFFFF  
16K  
Allocated to Console Redirection if enabled, otherwise  
can be used for options ROM’s  
128K  
System BIOS Shadowed  
00100000 – PCI Memory  
allocated to first PCI device  
Typically it can go up to 3GB  
FEC00000 – FEC0FFFF  
FEC10000 – FEC1FFFF  
FEC20000 – FECFFFFF  
FEE00000 – FEF00000  
FF000000 – FFDFFFFF  
64K  
Reserved. Unused on this platform  
Reclaimed. If main memory exceeds this region  
IOAPIC allocated to the PID  
64K  
Reclaimed. If main memory exceeds this region  
Reserved  
896K  
1MB  
14MB  
Reclaimed. If main memory exceeds this region  
LOCAL APIC  
Reclaimed. If main memory exceeds this region  
Unused. Reclaimed. If main memory exceeds this  
region  
FFE00000 – FFFFFFFF  
100000000 – 1FFFFFFFF  
2MB  
4GB  
Main System BIOS  
If memory exists  
186  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCI Configuration and Device Map  
Table 32. PCI Map  
Device  
Segment  
Device Number  
00h  
Hot Plug Controller  
PCI Slot 1  
PCI Slot 2  
Embedded LVDS  
Embedded VGA  
PIIX4e  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
D
D
D
04h  
05h  
0Ah  
0Ch  
0Fh  
MAC  
14h  
PB64  
18h  
PB64  
19h  
PB64  
1Ah  
1Bh  
00h  
PB64  
Hot Plug Controller  
PCI Slot 3  
PCI Slot 4  
PCI Slot 5  
PCI Slot 6  
PID  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
09h  
Hot Plug Controller  
PCI Slot 7  
PCI Slot 8  
Hot Plug Controller  
PCI Slot 9  
PCI Slot 10  
00h  
04h  
05h  
00h  
04h  
05h  
Interrupts  
The table below recommends the logical interrupt mapping of interrupt sources; it reflects a typical  
configuration, but these interrupts can be changed by the user. Use the information to determine  
how to program each interrupt. The actual interrupt map is defined using configuration registers in  
the PIIX4E and the I/O controller. I/O Redirection Registers in the I/O APIC are provided for each  
interrupt signal; the signals define hardware interrupt signal characteristics for APIC messages sent  
to local APIC(s).  
NOTE  
To disable either IDE controller and reuse the interrupt: If you plan to  
disable either IDE controller to reuse the interrupt for that controller, you  
must physically unplug the IDE cable from the board connector (IDE0) if a  
cable is present. Simply disabling the drive by configuring the SSU option  
does not make the interrupt available.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 33. Interrupts  
PID Interrupt  
PCI Interrupt  
Component/PCI Slot #  
PCI Bus  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D
C
B
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
P10  
P10  
PCI-D  
PCI-D  
PCI-A  
PCI-D  
PCI-D  
PCI-D  
PCI-D  
PCI-D  
PCI-D  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-C  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-B  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-B  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
PCI-A  
All  
Onboard SCSI Channel B  
P10  
P10  
P9  
P9  
P9  
P9  
P8  
P8  
P8  
P8  
P7  
P7  
P7  
P7  
P6  
P6  
P6  
P6  
P5  
P5  
P5  
P5  
P4  
P4  
P4  
P4  
P3  
P3  
P3  
Video  
PIIX4e  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
A
D
A
D
C
B
A
D
P3  
P2  
P2  
P2  
P2  
P1  
P1  
P1  
C
B
A
Onboard SCSI Channel A  
PCI Hotplug Interrupt  
SCBERR#  
A
NMI  
Unused  
P1 – P10  
MAC  
P1  
PIIX4e  
---  
---  
PCI-A  
---  
---  
188  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Modes  
The CL-GD5480 integrated video controller provides all standard IBM VGA modes. With  
8 MB of SDRAM standard. The ATI Rage Xl supports all the standard VGA, XVGA, SVGA  
modes, with a maximum resolution of 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz. See the ATI Rage XL specification  
for more details.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Technical Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Power System: Description/Calculating  
Power Usage  
This appendix describes the modular power system and explains how to calculate power usage for  
your server.  
WARNING  
Only a QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIAN is authorized to remove  
the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server.  
Before removing the covers, see “Safety: Before You Remove Server  
Covers” on page 93 and “ Warnings and Cautions” on page 94.  
Power System  
The modular power system for the server is provided by up to three 750 watt autoranging power  
supplies and a midplane. The power system may be configured with two power supplies  
(standard) or three power supplies (2 + 1, redundant). The power supplies are mounted in a  
2 + 1 pattern in the back of the chassis along the bottom. Each power supply has an integrated fan  
for cooling.  
The midplane provides connectors for the hot-swap power supplies. The midplane also provides  
the interface logic for power supply related management functions such as  
Power supply presence detection.  
Power supply fault signal reporting.  
Care must be taken not to overload a branch circuit of the AC mains by plugging too many power  
cords into a single AC circuit. We recommend plugging the power cord of the server into a  
separate circuit.  
If a power supply fails in the redundant power system, the yellow power supply failure LED on the  
front panel starts flashing. The supply can be hot-swapped—removed and replaced—without  
turning off the power or impacting server operations (providing that 3 power supplies are installed.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Supply Input Voltages  
Table 34. Power Supply AC Input Ratings  
Parameter  
Minimum  
90 / 180  
47  
Nominal  
Maximum  
132 / 264  
63  
Units  
V RMS  
Hz  
V in (230)  
110-120 / 200-240  
50 / 60  
V in Frequency  
AC Input Current  
13 A @ 110 VAC  
7 A @ 220 VAC  
Ampere  
The 750 watt autoranging power supplies are capable of handling up to two hard drives at 28 watts  
per drive (typical 3.5-inch wide by 1-inch high, 10 K RPM drives), eight processors at a maximum  
of 65 watts per processor, and up to 32 GB of PC100 registered DIMMs.  
The total power requirement for the board set exceeds the 240 VA energy hazard limit that defines  
an operator-accessible area. The 240 VA protection circuits protect the user from a  
240 VA energy hazard while hot-swapping—installing or removing—a hard disk drive or fan  
system.  
Power Supply Output Voltages  
Table 35. Power Supply Output Ratings (110 V / 220 V)  
Two Supplies1  
Nonredundant  
Three Supplies1  
Redundant  
Power Supply Outputs  
Individual Supply  
31 A / 36 A  
31 A / 36 A  
31 A / 36 A  
1 A  
3.3 V  
58 A / 68 A  
58 A / 64 A  
58 A / 68 A  
1 A  
58 A / 68 A  
58 A / 64 A  
58 A / 68 A  
1 A  
5 V  
12 V  
-12 V  
5 V Standby  
Vbias = + 15 V  
1 A  
1.75 A  
1.75 A  
200 mA  
200 mA  
100 mA  
1
Forced load sharing is for 5, 3.3, and 12 V only. The +5 V standby load sharing is the technique for passive load  
sharing.  
192  
Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Server Current Usage  
Table 36 lists the current usage for both minimally and fully configured servers. You can easily  
calculate power usage in the server from the numbers provided. The table is for reference only. It  
is not meant to provide the exact current usage in the server; exact values depend on exact  
configuration—size and number of processors, DIMMs, hard drives, add-in boards, etc.  
Table 36. Server Boardset Voltages and Currents  
Board  
Spec2  
Units +3.3V  
+5V  
+12V  
-12V  
+5 VSB +15 VSB Power  
I/O carrier  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
0.20  
7.99  
2.00  
0.70  
0.00  
0.20  
1.20  
0.25  
0.65  
0.75  
0.10  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
9.81  
45.20 5.00  
12.17 4.50  
330.52  
Max step load Adc  
Profusion carrier with mezzanines  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
4.60  
12.00  
2.00  
0.75  
1.50  
0.75  
0.25  
0.000 0.00  
0.000 0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
21.93  
46.00  
18.00  
599.10  
Max step load Adc  
Front panel (plugs into profusion carrier)  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
0.00  
0.00  
0.05  
0.23  
0.18  
2.00  
5.40  
0.10  
0.001 0.10  
0.010 0.25  
0.001 0.15  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
24.76  
67.32  
Max step load Adc  
Memory carrier 1  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
1.20  
23.00  
8.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.000 0.00  
0.000 0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
3.96  
75.90  
Max step load Adc  
Memory carrier 21  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
0.00  
23.00  
8.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.000 0.00  
0.000 0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
75.90  
Max step load Adc  
Peripherals (SCSI backplane)  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
0.00  
0.00  
0.70  
4.50  
0.90  
0.25  
5.99  
5.40  
0.000 0.00  
0.000 0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
6.50  
94.38  
Max step load Adc  
Midplane  
Min load  
Max load  
Adc  
Adc  
Adc  
Adc  
A/uS  
Adc  
W
0.01  
0.01  
2.20  
0.01  
2.50  
0.20  
0.00  
0.05  
0.05  
0.20  
3
0.20  
Total min load  
6.00  
0.20  
0.25  
0.10  
1.21  
0.75  
0.25  
0.10  
1.00  
5
66.96  
Total max step load  
Max step di/dt  
20.00  
0.50  
14.00 28.00  
1.00 0.60  
51.44 62.40  
Total max load  
66.00  
217.8  
Total load pwr: 1246.32  
257.2 748.80 14.52  
1246.32  
1271.24  
Total power (includes 2% distribution loss)  
1
2
Minimum load for second memory board is zero; this assumes no board is installed.  
See Table 37 for definition of minimum and maximum configurations.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 37. Minimum/Maximum Current Rating Configurations  
Board  
Minimum Configuration  
Maximum Configuration  
I/O carrier  
I/O carrier, I/O riser board  
I/O carrier, I/O riser board, PCI adapter boards  
(10 at maximum load)  
Profusion  
carrier  
Profusion carrier, processor mezzanine  
board (one), Pentium III Xeon processor  
(one), A450NX processor termination  
modules (three)  
Profusion carrier, processor mezzanine boards  
(two), Pentium III Xeon processor  
(eight at FMB maximum load), cache  
coherency boards (two at 4 Tag configuration)  
Memory  
carrier (each)  
Memory carrier, 128 MB DIMM (one) (one Memory carrier, 256 MB DIMM (16)  
memory carrier only)  
Front panel  
Midplane  
Front panel  
Midplane  
Front panel  
Midplane  
Peripheral  
bay  
One diskette drive, one CD-ROM drive,  
SCSI backplane  
One diskette drive, one CD-ROM drive, two  
hard disk drives, SCSI backplane  
Calculating Power Usage  
Use the worksheet in Table 38 to calculate the total DC power used by your server configuration.  
The documentation that comes with each add-in device should specify its current and voltage  
requirements.  
To calculate the total combined wattage for your server:  
1. List the current for each board and device in the appropriate voltage level column in the table.  
2. Add the currents in each column of the table.  
3. Multiply the voltage by the total current to get the total wattage for each voltage level.  
4. Add the total wattage for each voltage level to arrive at a total combined power usage on the  
power supply.  
194  
Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 38. Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage  
Current (maximum) at voltage levels:  
Device  
+3.3 V  
+5 V  
+12 V  
-12 V  
PHP I/O carrier  
5 A  
4.25 A  
2 A  
1 A  
64-bit PCI slot 1, P1  
64-bit PCI slot 2, P2  
64-bit PCI slot 3, P3  
64-bit PCI slot 4, P4  
64-bit PCI slot 5, P5  
64-bit PCI slot 6, P6  
64-bit PCI slot 7, P7  
64-bit PCI slot 8, P8  
64-bit PCI slot 9, P9  
64-bit PCI slot 10, P10  
Profusion carrier with four 65 W processors  
Profusion carrier with four 65 W processors  
Memory module (16 DIMMs)  
Memory module (16 DIMMs)  
3.5-inch diskette drive  
CD-ROM drive  
4.6 A  
6.2 A  
6.2 A  
28.5 A  
28.5 A  
4.6 A  
12.03 A  
12.03 A  
0.3 A  
0.4 A  
1.0 A  
1st SCA SCSI hard disk drive  
2nd SCA SCSI hard disk drive  
Six cooling fans (.49 A/fan @ 12 V)  
Total Current  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
The total combined wattage must be less than 1232 watts for your server  
configuration. The power must be less than:  
201 watts for +3.3 V  
340 watts for +5 V  
672 watts for +12 V  
12 watts for -12 V  
2.4 watts for 24 V  
5 watts for +5 V standby  
Table 39. Total Combined Power Used by Your Server  
Voltage Level and Total Current (V x A = W) Total Watts for Each Voltage Level  
(+3.3 V) x (  
(+5 V) x (  
(-5 V) x (  
A)  
A)  
A)  
A)  
A)  
A)  
W
W
W
W
W
W
(+12 V) x (  
(-12 V) x (  
(+24 V) x (  
Total Combined Wattage =  
W
196  
Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Equipment Log and Configuration  
Worksheets  
Equipment Log  
Use the blank equipment log provided here to record information about your system. You will  
need some of this information when you run the SSU.  
Item  
Manufacturer Name and Model Number  
Serial Number Date Installed  
System  
Profusion carrier  
I/O carrier  
Processor speed and cache  
Video display  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Diskette drive A  
Diskette drive B  
Tape drive  
CD-ROM drive  
Hard disk drive 1  
Hard disk drive 2  
Hard disk drive 3  
Hard disk drive 4  
Hard disk drive 5  
continued  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Equipment Log (continued)  
Item  
Manufacturer Name and Model Number  
Serial Number Date Installed  
SCSI host adapter board 1  
198  
Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Worksheets  
The rest of this chapter consists of worksheets to record the settings you make when configuring  
the system using the SSU, BIOS Setup, and the QLogic SCSI Utility. If default values ever need  
to be restored to CMOS (e.g., after a CMOS-clear), you must reconfigure the system. Referring to  
the filled-in worksheets could make your task easier.  
Circle or write in your selections or the values that are displayed onscreen.  
SSU Worksheets  
Add and Remove Boards  
Worksheet 1. Add/Remove Boards  
System board  
PCI Host Bridge Device  
PCI SCSI Device  
Bus 0 Dev 0  
Bus 0 Dev B  
Bus 0 Dev 10  
Bus 0 Dev 12  
Bus 0 Dev 14  
PCI Ethernet Device  
PCI VGA Device  
PCI Multifunction Device  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System board (SSU, Change Configuration Settings)  
Worksheet 2. Systems Group  
System Identification and Version Information  
SSU Configuration File Version  
MP Spec. Version  
1.1 / 1.4  
Processor Speed Setting  
Worksheet 3. Memory Subsystem Group  
Onboard Disk Controllers  
Onboard Communication Devices  
Enable / Disable  
Worksheet 4. Onboard Disk Controllers  
Onboard Diskette Controller  
Enable / Disable  
Enable / Disable  
Enable / Disable  
Primary Onboard IDE Controller  
Secondary Onboard IDE Controller  
Worksheet 5. Onboard Communications Devices  
Serial Port 1 Configuration  
Serial Port 2 Configuration  
Serial Port 2 Mode  
Parallel Port Configuration  
Parallel Port Mode  
Worksheet 6. Diskette Drive Subsystems Group  
Diskette drive A Options  
Diskette drive B Options  
Worksheet 7. IDE Subsystem Group  
IDE Configuration  
Primary Master  
(drive name)  
None / User / Auto / CD  
IDE Drive Options  
Primary Master  
2 Sector/Block / 4 Sector/Block 8 Sector/Block / 16 Sector/Block / Disable  
PIO 1 / PIO 2 / PIO 3 / PIO 4  
Transfer Mode  
Primary Master  
IDE Configuration  
Primary Slave  
(drive name)  
None / User / Auto / CD  
IDE Drive Options  
Primary Slave  
2 Sector/Block / 4 Sector/Block / 8 Sector/Block / 16 Sector/Block / Disable  
Translation Mode  
Primary Slave  
Standard CHS  
Logical Block Addressing  
Transfer Mode  
Primary Slave  
PIO 1 / PIO 2 / PIO 3 / PIO 4  
200  
Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheet 8. Multiboot Group  
Boot Device Priority  
Diskette Drive  
Removable Devices  
Hard Drive  
ATAPI CD-ROM Drive  
Diagnostic Boot  
Worksheet 9. Keyboard and Mouse Subsystem Group  
Typematic Delay  
250 ms delay / 500 ms delay  
750 ms delay / 1000 ms delay  
Typematic Speed  
30 CPS / (other)  
Mouse Control option  
Mouse Enabled / Disabled  
Worksheet 10. Console Redirection  
COM Port for Redirection  
Port 3F8/IRQ4 / Port 2F8/IRQ3  
Port 3E8h/IRQ 3 / Disable  
Serial Port baud rate  
Hardware Flow Control  
Terminal Type  
9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k / 115.2k  
None / CTS/RTS / CTS/RTS + CD / Xoff/Xon  
PC - ANSI / VT 100  
Worksheet 11. Security Subsystems  
Administrative Password  
User Password  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
None / Ctrl-Alt-{  
Secure Mode Hot-Key  
Lockout Timer  
}
Disable / { } minutes  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
Secure Boot Mode  
Video Blanking  
Diskette Writes  
Reset/Power Switch Locking  
Worksheet 12. SCSI ROM BIOS Options Group  
Onboard SCSI ROM BIOS scan Enable / Disable  
Worksheet 13. Management Subsystem Group  
System Sensor Control  
Write your selections on the separate “Management Subsystem,  
System Sensor Control Worksheet” on page 202.  
SMM Enable  
Enable / Disable  
Event Logging  
Enable / Disable  
PCI System Error Detection  
Enable / Disable  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management Subsystem, System Sensor Control Worksheet  
For each sensor control, the display includes the choices shown below, with blanks for entering  
values. Write in both the sensor control and the values you select. This worksheet (two pages)  
provides space for a number of sensor controls; if you need more space, copy these pages to extend  
your worksheet.  
Item:  
Item:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Upper  
Upper  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower  
Lower  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower Fatal:  
Lower Fatal:  
Item:  
Item:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Upper  
Upper  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower  
Lower  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower Fatal:  
Lower Fatal:  
Item:  
Item:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Upper  
Upper  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower  
Lower  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower Fatal:  
Lower Fatal:  
Item:  
Item:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Upper  
Upper  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower  
Lower  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower Fatal:  
Lower Fatal:  
202  
Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item:  
Item:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Upper  
Upper  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower  
Lower  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower Fatal:  
Lower Fatal:  
Item:  
Item:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Disable / Enable  
Upper Fatal:  
Upper  
Upper  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower  
Lower  
Warning:  
Warning:  
Lower Fatal:  
Lower Fatal:  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BIOS Setup Worksheets  
Worksheet 14. Main Menu  
System Date  
System Time  
Legacy Diskette A  
Disabled / 360 KB / 1.2 MB / 720 KB  
1.44 MB/1.25 MB / 2.88 MB  
Legacy Diskette B  
Language  
Disabled / 360 KB / 1.2 MB / 720 KB / 1.44 MB / 2.88 MB  
English / Spanish / Italian / French / German  
Worksheet 15. IDE Submenu  
Type  
Auto / CD-ROM / User / 1-39  
Cylinders  
Heads  
Sectors  
Maximum Capacity  
MultiSector Transfer  
LBA Mode Control  
32 Bit I/O  
Disabled / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Transfer Mode  
Ultra DMA  
Standard / Fast PIO 1 / Fast PIO 2 / Fast PIO 3 / Fast PIO 4  
Disabled / Mode 0 / Mode 1 / Mode 2  
Worksheet 16. Keyboard Features Submenu  
Num Lock  
Auto / On / Off  
Key Click  
Disabled / Enabled  
Keyboard autorepeat rate  
Keyboard autorepeat delay  
30 / 26.7 / 21.8 / 18.5 / 13.3 / 10 / 6 / 2  
¼ / ½ / ¾ / 1  
Worksheet 17. Advanced Menu  
Reset Configuration Data  
Use Multiprocessor Specification  
Large Disk Access Mode  
Yes / No  
1.1 / 1.4  
LBA / CHS  
Enabled / Disabled  
Pause Before Boot  
Worksheet 18. PCI Mode Submenu  
Option ROM Scan  
Enable Master  
Latency Timer  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Default / <time>  
Worksheet 19. PCI Devices Submenu  
Option ROM Scan  
Enable Master  
Latency Timer  
Disabled / Enabled  
Enabled / Disabled  
Default / <time>  
204  
Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheet 20. I/O Device Configuration Submenu  
Serial Port A  
Base I/O Address  
Interrupt  
Disabled / Enabled / Auto / OS Controlled  
3F8h / 2F8h / 3E8h / 2E8h  
4 / 3  
Serial Port B  
Base I/O Address  
Interrupt  
Disabled / Enabled / Auto / OS Controlled  
3F8h / 2F8h / 3E8h / 2E8h  
4 / 3  
Parallel Port  
Mode  
Disabled / Enabled / Auto / OS Controlled  
Output only / Bidirectional / EPP / ECP  
378 / 278 / 178 / 3BC  
5 / 7  
Base I/O Address  
Interrupt  
DMA channel  
Diskette controller  
1 / 3  
Disabled / Enabled  
Worksheet 21. Advanced Chipset Control Submenu  
Base RAM Step  
1 MB / 1 KB / Every location  
1 MB / 1 KB / Every location  
Enabled / Disabled  
Extended RAM Step  
L2 Cache  
ISA Expansion Aliasing  
Memory Scrubbing  
Restreaming Buffer  
Multiboot Support  
Enabled / Disabled  
Enabled / Disabled  
Enabled / Disabled  
Enabled / Disabled  
Worksheet 22. Security Menu  
Administrator Password is  
User Password is  
Clear / Set  
Clear / Set  
Password on Boot  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / <time>  
<key stroke>  
Secure Mode Timer  
Secure Mode Hot Key  
Secure Mode Boot  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Video Blanking  
Diskette Write Protect  
Worksheet 23. Server Menu  
Processor Retest  
No / Yes  
EMP Password Switch  
EMP Access Mode  
Disabled / Enabled  
Preboot Only / Always Active / Disabled  
Enabled / Disabled  
EMP Restricted Access Mode  
EMP Direct Connect/Modem  
Mode  
Direct Connect / Modem Mode  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheet 24. System Management Submenu  
Firmware SMIs  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
Disabled / Enabled  
System Event Logging  
Clear Event Log  
Assert NMI on SBE  
Assert NMI on AERR  
Assert NMI on BERR  
Assert NMI on PERR  
Assert NMI on SERR  
Enabled Host Bus ECC  
Worksheet 25. Console Redirection Submenu  
COM Port Address  
IRQ#  
Disabled / 3F8 / 2F8 / 3E8  
3 / 4  
Baud Rate  
9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k / 115.2k  
None / CTS/RTS / XON/XOFF / CTS/RTS + CD  
Flow Control  
Worksheet 26. Boot Menu  
Diskette Check  
Disabled / Enabled  
1 / 4  
Maximum No. of I2O Drives  
Message Timeout Multiplier  
Pause During Post  
1 / 2 / 8 / 10 / 50 / 100 / 1000  
Disabled / Enabled  
Worksheet 27. Boot Device Priority Submenu  
Boot Priority 1  
Boot Priority 2  
Boot Priority 3  
Boot Priority 4  
Diskette Drive / <other>  
Removable Devices / <other>  
Hard Drive / <other>  
ATAPI CD-ROM Drive / <other>  
206  
Equipment Log and Configuration Worksheets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C Regulatory Specifications  
Regulatory and Environmental Specifications  
Environmental Specifications  
Operating temperature  
Nonoperating temperature  
Altitude  
10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F). See Altitude exception.  
-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F).  
0 to 3048 m (0 to 10000 ft.). Note: Maximum ambient temperature is  
linearly de-rated between 1520 m (5000 ft.) and 3050m (10000 ft.) by  
1°C per 305 m (1000 ft.).  
Operating humidity  
85%, noncondensing at 40 °C (104 °F).  
<33°C (91.4 °F) wet bulb at 40 °C (104 °F) without peripherals.  
Nonoperating humidity  
Safety  
95%, noncondensing at +55 °C (131 °F).  
UL 1950, CSA 950, IEC 950, TUV EN60 950, NEMKO.  
Emissions  
Certified to FCC Class A; tested to CISPR 22B, EN 55022, and registered  
with VCCI.  
Immunity  
Verified to comply with EN 50082-2.  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Tested to ESD levels up to 20 kilovolts (kV) air discharge without physical  
damage as per Intel environmental test specification.  
Acoustic  
Sound pressure: <57 dbA at ambient temperatures. <28 °C measured at  
bystander positions in operating mode.  
Sound power: <6.5 BA at ambient temperatures. <28 °C in operating  
mode.  
Declaration of the Manufacturer or Importer  
We hereby certify that this product is in compliance with EU EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.  
Safety Compliance  
USA/Canada:  
UL 1950, 3rd Edition/CSA 22.2, No. 950-M93, 3rd Edition.  
Europe:  
TUV to EN60950 2nd Edition with Amendments, A1 + A2 + A3 + A4.  
International:  
CB Certificate and Report to IEC 950, 2nd Edition w/ A1 + A2 + A3 + A4  
and national deviations, including EMKO-TSE (74-SEC) 207/94.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)  
USA:  
FCC CFR 47 Part 15, Class A  
Canada:  
Europe:  
IC ICES-003 Class A  
EN55022, Class A, Radiated & Conducted Emissions  
EN50082-1 Generic Immunity Standard  
EN61000-4-2 Immunity (level 2 contact discharge, level 3 air discharge)  
EN61000-4-3 Radiated Immunuty (level 2)  
EN61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient (level 2)  
EN61000-3-2 Line Harmonics  
International:  
Japan:  
CISPR 22/93, Class A  
VCCI Class A ITE (CISPR 22 B limit)  
IEC 1000-3-2; Line Harmonics  
New Zealand:  
Australia:  
CISPR 22/93, Class A  
AS/NZS 3548 (CISPR 22/93), Class A  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice (USA)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,  
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which  
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices (International)  
English translation of the notice above:  
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council For Interference  
by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used in a domestic environment, radio  
disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective  
actions.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils  
numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils  
Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadian des Communications.  
English translation of the notice above:  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital  
apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,”  
ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications.  
208  
Regulatory Specificiations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Warnings  
WARNING: English (US)  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français  
WARNUNG: Deutsch  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: English (US)  
The power supply in this product contains no user-serviceable parts. There may be more  
than one supply in this product. Refer servicing only to qualified personnel.  
Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type  
required.  
The DC push-button on/off switch on the system does not turn off system AC power. To  
remove AC power from the system, you must unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet  
or power supply.  
SAFETY STEPS: Whenever you remove the chassis covers to access the inside of the  
system, follow these steps:  
1. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the system.  
2. Turn off the system by using the push-button on/off power switch on the system.  
3. Unplug all AC power cords from the system or from wall outlets.  
4. Label and disconnect all cables connected to I/O connectors or ports on the back of the  
system.  
5. Provide some electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection by wearing an antistatic wrist  
strap attached to chassis ground of the system—any unpainted metal surface—when  
handling components.  
6. Do not operate the system with the chassis covers removed.  
After you have completed the six SAFETY steps above, you can remove the system covers.  
To do this:  
1. Unlock and remove the padlock from the back of the system if a padlock has been  
installed.  
2. Remove and save all screws from the covers.  
3. Remove the covers.  
For proper cooling and airflow, always reinstall the chassis covers before turning on the  
system. Operating the system without the covers in place can damage system parts. To  
install the covers:  
1. Check first to make sure you have not left loose tools or parts inside the system.  
2. Check that cables, add-in boards, and other components are properly installed.  
3. Attach the covers to the chassis with the screws removed earlier, and tighten them  
firmly.  
4. Insert and lock the padlock to the system to prevent unauthorized access inside the  
system.  
5. Connect all external cables and the AC power cord(s) to the system.  
continued  
210  
Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: English (continued)  
A microprocessor and heat sink may be hot if the system has been running. Also, there may  
be sharp pins and edges on some board and chassis parts. Contact should be made with  
care. Consider wearing protective gloves.  
Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or  
equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Discard used batteries  
according to manufacturer’s instructions.  
The system is designed to operate in a typical office environment. Choose a site that is:  
Clean and free of airborne particles (other than normal room dust).  
Well ventilated and away from sources of heat including direct sunlight.  
Away from sources of vibration or physical shock.  
Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices.  
In regions that are susceptible to electrical storms, we recommend you plug your  
system into a surge suppresser and disconnect telecommunication lines to your modem  
during an electrical storm.  
Provided with a properly grounded wall outlet.  
Provided with sufficient space to access the server power supply cords, because it  
serves as the product’s main power disconnect.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français  
Le bloc d'alimentation de ce produit ne contient aucune pièce pouvant être réparée par  
l'utilisateur. Ce produit peut contenir plus d'un bloc d'alimentation. Veuillez contacter un  
technicien qualifié en cas de problème.  
Ne pas utiliser ni modifier le cordon d'alimentation secteur fourni, s'il ne correspond pas  
exactement au type requis.  
Le bouton-poussoir Marche/Arrêt de l'alimentation CC situé sur le système ne coupe pas  
l'alimentation en CA du système. Pour couper toute alimentation en CA au système, vous  
devez débrancher le cordon d'alimentation secteur de la prise murale ou du bloc  
d'alimentation.  
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ - Lorsque vous ouvrez le boîtier pour accéder à l’intérieur du  
système, suivez les consignes suivantes :  
1. Mettez hors tension tous les périphériques connectés au système.  
2. Mettez le système hors tension en mettant l’interrupteur général en position OFF  
(bouton-poussoir).  
3. Débranchez tous les cordons d’alimentation c.a. du système et des prises murales.  
4. Identifiez et débranchez tous les câbles reliés aux connecteurs d’E-S ou aux accès  
derrière le système.  
5. Pour prévenir les décharges électrostatiques lorsque vous touchez aux composants,  
portez une bande antistatique pour poignet et reliez-la à la masse du système (toute  
surface métallique non peinte du boîtier).  
6. Ne faites pas fonctionner le système tandis que le boîtier est ouvert.  
Une fois TOUTES les étapes précédentes accomplies, vous pouvez retirer les panneaux du  
système. Procédez comme suit :  
1. Si un cadenas a été installé sur à l’arrière du système, déverrouillez-le et retirez-le.  
2. Retirez toutes les vis des panneaux et mettez-les dans un endroit sûr.  
3. Retirez les panneaux.  
Afin de permettre le refroidissement et l’aération du système, réinstallez toujours les  
panneaux du boîtier avant de mettre le système sous tension. Le fonctionnement du  
système en l’absence des panneaux risque d’endommager ses pièces. Pour installer les  
panneaux, procédez comme suit :  
1. Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir oublié d’outils ou de pièces démontées dans le système.  
2. Assurez-vous que les câbles, les cartes d’extension et les autres composants sont bien  
installés.  
3. Revissez solidement les panneaux du boîtier avec les vis retirées plus tôt.  
4. Remettez le cadenas en place et verrouillez-le afin de prévenir tout accès non autorisé  
à l’intérieur du système.  
5. Rebranchez tous les cordons d’alimentation c. a. et câbles externes au système.  
suite  
212  
Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français (suite)  
Le microprocesseur et le dissipateur de chaleur peuvent être chauds si le système a été  
sous tension. Faites également attention aux broches aiguës des cartes et aux bords  
tranchants du capot. Nous vous recommandons l'usage de gants de protection.  
Danger d'explosion si la batterie n'est pas remontée correctement. Remplacer uniquement  
avec une batterie du même type ou d'un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant.  
Disposez des piles usées selon les instructions du fabricant.  
Le système a été conçu pour fonctionner dans un cadre de travail normal. L'emplacement  
choisi doit être :  
Propre et dépourvu de poussière en suspension (sauf la poussière normale).  
Bien aéré et loin des sources de chaleur, y compris du soleil direct.  
A l'abri des chocs et des sources de vibrations.  
Isolé de forts champs électromagnétiques géenérés par des appareils électriques.  
Dans les régions sujettes aux orages magnétiques il est recomandé de brancher votre  
système à un supresseur de surtension, et de débrancher toutes les lignes de  
télécommunications de votre modem durant un orage.  
Muni d'une prise murale correctement mise à la terre.  
Suffisamment spacieux pour vous permettre d'accéder aux câbles d'alimentation (ceux-  
ci étant le seul moyen de mettre le système hors tension).  
Un espace suffisant est nécessaire pour accéder au cordon d'alimentation du serveur,  
celui-ci jouant le rôle de déconnecteur d'alimentation principale du produit.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNUNG: Deutsch  
Benutzer können am Netzgerät dieses Produkts keine Reparaturen vornehmen. Das  
Produkt enthält möglicherweise mehrere Netzgeräte. Wartungsarbeiten müssen von  
qualifizierten Technikern ausgeführt werden.  
Versuchen Sie nicht, das mitgelieferte Netzkabel zu ändern oder zu verwenden, wenn es  
sich nicht genau um den erforderlichen Typ handelt.  
.
Der Wechselstrom des Systems wird durch den Ein-/Aus-Schalter für Gleichstrom nicht  
ausgeschaltet. Ziehen Sie jedes Wechselstrom-Netzkabel aus der Steckdose bzw. Dem  
Netzgerät, um den Stromanschluß des Systems zu unterbrechen.  
SICHERHEISMASSNAHMEN: Immer wenn Sie die Gehäuseabdeckung abnehmen um an  
das Systeminnere zu gelangen, sollten Sie folgende Schritte beachten:  
1. Schalten Sie alle an Ihr System angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus.  
2. Schalten Sie das System mit dem Hauptschalter aus.  
3. Ziehen Sie den Stromanschlußstecker Ihres Systems aus der Steckdose.  
4. Auf der Rückseite des Systems beschriften und ziehen Sie alle Anschlußkabel von den  
I/O Anschlüssen oder Ports ab.  
5. Tragen Sie ein geerdetes Antistatik Gelenkband, um elektrostatische Ladungen (ESD)  
über blanke Metallstellen bei der Handhabung der Komponenten zu vermeiden.  
6. Schalten Sie das System niemals ohne ordnungsgemäß montiertes Gehäuse ein.  
Nachdem Sie die oben erwähnten ersten sechs SICHERHEITSSCHRITTE durchgeführt  
haben, können Sie die Abdeckung abnehmen, indem Sie:  
1. Öffnen und entfernen Sie die Verschlußeinrichtung (Padlock) auf der Rückseite des  
Systems, falls eine Verschlußeinrichtung installiert ist.  
2. Entfernen Sie alle Schrauben der Gehäuseabdeckung.  
3. Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab.  
Zur ordnungsgemäßen Kühlung und Lüftung muß die Gehäuseabdeckung immer wieder vor  
dem Einschalten installiert werden. Ein Betrieb des Systems ohne angebrachte Abdeckung  
kann Ihrem System oder Teile darin beschädigen. Um die Abdeckung wieder anzubringen:  
1. Vergewissern Sie sich, daß Sie keine Werkzeuge oder Teile im Innern des Systems  
zurückgelassen haben.  
2. Überprüfen Sie alle Kabel, Zusatzkarten und andere Komponenten auf  
ordnungsgemäßen Sitz und Installation.  
3. Bringen Sie die Abdeckungen wieder am Gehäuse an, indem Sie die zuvor gelösten  
Schrauben wieder anbringen. Ziehen Sie diese gut an.  
4. Bringen Sie die Verschlußeinrichtung (Padlock) wieder an und schließen Sie diese, um  
ein unerlaubtes Öffnen des Systems zu verhindern.  
5. Schließen Sie alle externen Kabel und den AC Stromanschlußstecker Ihres Systems  
wieder an.  
Fortsetzung  
214  
Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNUNG: Deutsch (Fortsetzung)  
Der Mikroprozessor und der Kühler sind möglicherweise erhitzt, wenn das System in Betrieb  
ist. Außerdem können einige Platinen und Gehäuseteile scharfe Spitzen und Kanten  
aufweisen. Arbeiten an Platinen und Gehäuse sollten vorsichtig ausgeführt werden. Sie  
sollten Schutzhandschuhe tragen.  
Bei falschem Einsetzen einer neuen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Die Batterie darf nur  
durch denselben oder einen entsprechenden, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp  
ersetzt werden. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien den Anweisungen des Herstellers  
entsprechend.  
Das System wurde für den Betrieb in einer normalen Büroumgebung entwickelt. Der  
Standort sollte:  
sauber und staubfrei sein (Hausstaub ausgenommen);  
gut gelüftet und keinen Heizquellen ausgesetzt sein (einschließlich direkter  
Sonneneinstrahlung);  
keinen Erschütterungen ausgesetzt sein;  
keine starken, von elektrischen Geräten erzeugten elektromagnetischen Felder  
aufweisen;  
in Regionen, in denen elektrische Stürme auftreten, mit einem  
Überspannungsschutzgerät verbunden sein; während eines elektrischen Sturms sollte  
keine Verbindung der Telekommunikationsleitungen mit dem Modem bestehen;  
mit einer geerdeten Wechselstromsteckdose ausgerüstet sein;  
über ausreichend Platz verfügen, um Zugang zu den Netzkabeln zu gewährleisten, da  
der Stromanschluß des Produkts hauptsächlich über die Kabel unterbrochen wird.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano  
Rivolgersi ad un tecnico specializzato per la riparazione dei componenti dell’alimentazione di  
questo prodotto. È possibile che il prodotto disponga di più fonti di alimentazione.  
Non tentare di modificare o utilizzare il cavo di alimentazione in c.a. in dotazione, se non è  
esattamente del tipo richiesto.  
Il pulsante di Accensione/spegnimento della corrente continua sul sistema non interrompe  
l'alimentazione in c.a. del sistema. Per scollegare anche l'alimentazione in c.a., è necessario  
disinserire il cavo di alimentazione in c.a. dalla presa a muro o dall'alimentatore.  
PASSI DI SICUREZZA: Qualora si rimuovano le coperture del telaio per accedere  
all’interno del sistema, seguire i seguenti passi:  
1. Spegnere tutti i dispositivi periferici collegati al sistema.  
2. Spegnere il sistema, usando il pulsante spento/acceso dell’interruttore del sistema.  
3. Togliere tutte le spine dei cavi del sistema dalle prese elettriche.  
4. Identificare e sconnettere tutti i cavi attaccati ai collegamenti I/O od alle prese installate  
sul retro del sistema.  
5. Qualora si tocchino i componenti, proteggersi dallo scarico elettrostatico (SES),  
portando un cinghia anti-statica da polso che è attaccata alla presa a terra del telaio del  
sistema – qualsiasi superficie non dipinta – .  
6. Non far operare il sistema quando il telaio è senza le coperture.  
Dopo aver seguito i sei passi di SICUREZZA sopracitati, togliere le coperture del telaio del  
sistema come seque:  
1. Aprire e rimuovere il lucchetto dal retro del sistema qualora ve ne fosse uno installato.  
2. Togliere e mettere in un posto sicuro tutte le viti delle coperture.  
3. Togliere le coperture.  
Per il giusto flusso dell’aria e raffreddamento del sistema, rimettere sempre le coperture del  
telaio prima di riaccendere il sistema. Operare il sistema senza le coperture al loro proprio  
posto potrebbe danneggiare i componenti del sistema. Per rimettere le coperture del telaio:  
1. Controllare prima che non si siano lasciati degli attrezzi o dei componenti dentro il  
sistema.  
2. Controllare che i cavi, dei supporti aggiuntivi ed altri componenti siano stati installati  
appropriatamente.  
3. Attaccare le coperture al telaio con le viti tolte in precedenza e avvitarle strettamente.  
4. Inserire e chiudere a chiave il lucchetto sul retro del sistema per impedire l’accesso non  
autorizzato al sistema.  
5. Ricollegare tutti i cavi esterni e le prolunghe AC del sistema.  
continua  
216  
Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano (continua)  
Se il sistema è stato a lungo in funzione, il microprocessore e il dissipatore di calore  
potrebbero essere surriscaldati. Fare attenzione alla presenza di piedini appuntiti e parti  
taglienti sulle schede e sul telaio. È consigliabile l'uso di guanti di protezione.  
Esiste il pericolo di un esplosione se la pila non viene sostituita in modo corretto. Utilizzare  
solo pile uguali o di tipo equivalente a quelle consigliate dal produttore. Per disfarsi delle  
pile usate, seguire le istruzioni del produttore.  
Il sistema è progettato per funzionare in un ambiente di lavoro tipo. Scegliere una  
postazione che sia:  
Pulita e libera da particelle in sospensione (a parte la normale polvere presente  
nell'ambiente).  
Ben ventilata e lontana da fonti di calore, compresa la luce solare diretta.  
Al riparo da urti e lontana da fonti di vibrazione.  
Isolata dai forti campi magnetici prodotti da dispositivi elettrici.  
In aree soggette a temporali, è consigliabile collegare il sistema ad un limitatore di  
corrente. In caso di temporali, scollegare le linee di comunicazione dal modem.  
Dotata di una presa a muro correttamente installata.  
Fornito di uno spazio sufficiente ad accedere al cavo di alimentazione del server,  
poiché si tratta del modo principale per scollegare l'alimentazione del sistema.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español  
El usuario debe abstenerse de manipular los componentes de la fuente de alimentación de  
este producto, cuya reparación debe dejarse exclusivamente en manos de personal técnico  
especializado. Puede que este producto disponga de más de una fuente de alimentación.  
No intente modificar ni utilizar el cable de alimentación de CA si no corresponde al tipo de  
cable exacto requerido.  
El conmutador del botón de comando de corriente continua del sistema no desactiva la  
alimentación de CA del sistema. Para interrumpir la alimentación de CA del sistema, debe  
desenchufar el cable de alimentación de CA de la toma de alimentación.  
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD: Cuando extraiga la tapa del chasis para acceder al  
interior del sistema, siga las siguientes instrucciones:  
1. Apague todos los dispositivos periféricos conectados al sistema.  
2. Apague el sistema presionando el interruptor encendido/apagado.  
3. Desconecte todos los cables de alimentación CA del sistema o de las tomas de  
corriente alterna.  
4. Identifique y desconecte todos los cables enchufados a los conectores E/S o a los  
puertos situados en la parte posterior del sistema.  
5. Cuando manipule los componentes, es importante protegerse contra la descarga  
electrostática (ESD). Puede hacerlo si utiliza una muñequera antiestática sujetada a la  
toma de tierra del chasis — o a cualquier tipo de superficie de metal sin pintar.  
6. No ponga en marcha el sistema si se han extraído las tapas del chasis.  
Después de completar las seis instrucciones de SEGURIDAD mencionadas, ya puede  
extraer las tapas del sistema. Para ello:  
1. Desbloquee y extraiga el bloqueo de seguridad de la parte posterior del sistema, si se  
ha instalado uno.  
2. Extraiga y guarde todos los tornillos de las tapas.  
3. Extraiga las tapas.  
Para obtener un enfriamiento y un flujo de aire adecuados, reinstale siempre las tapas del  
chasis antes de poner en marcha el sistema. Si pone en funcionamiento el sistema sin las  
tapas bien colocadas puede dañar los componentes del sistema. Para instalar las tapas:  
1. Asegúrese primero de no haber dejado herramientas o componentes sueltos dentro del  
sistema.  
2. Compruebe que los cables, las placas adicionales y otros componentes se hayan  
instalado correctamente.  
3. Incorpore las tapas al chasis mediante los tornillos extraídos anteriormente,  
tensándolos firmemente.  
4. Inserte el bloqueo de seguridad en el sistema y bloquéelo para impedir que pueda  
accederse al mismo sin autorización.  
5. Conecte todos los cables externos y los cables de alimentación CA al sistema.  
continúa  
218  
Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español (continúa)  
Si el sistema ha estado en funcionamiento, el microprocesador y el disipador de calor  
pueden estar aún calientes. También conviene tener en cuenta que en el chasis o en el  
tablero puede haber piezas cortantes o punzantes. Por ello, se recomienda precaución y el  
uso de guantes protectores.  
Existe peligro de explosión si la pila no se cambia de forma adecuada. Utilice solamente  
pilas iguales o del mismo tipo que las recomendadas por el fabricante del equipo. Para  
deshacerse de las pilas usadas, siga igualmente las instrucciones del fabricante.  
El sistema está diseñado para funcionar en un entorno de trabajo normal. Escoja un lugar:  
Limpio y libre de partículas en suspensión (salvo el polvo normal).  
Bien ventilado y alejado de fuentes de calor, incluida la luz solar directa.  
Alejado de fuentes de vibración.  
Aislado de campos electromagnéticos fuertes producidos por dispositivos eléctricos.  
En regiones con frecuentes tormentas eléctricas, se recomienda conectar su sistema a  
un eliminador de sobrevoltage y desconectar el módem de las líneas de  
telecomunicación durante las tormentas.  
Provisto de una toma de tierra correctamente instalada.  
Tenga espacio suficiente para acceder al cable de alimentación del servidor, ya que  
sirve para desconectar la alimentación principal del producto.  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Blank page  
220  
Warnings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
C
AC filter and cable  
cables, routing for removable media bays, 127  
cache coherency filters  
installing, 133  
installing, 117  
removing, 117  
add-in board  
removing, 132  
current limitations, 108  
installing/replacing, 108  
PCI, 108, 109  
removing, 111  
sensitive to ESD, 94  
Caution  
avoid damaging front panel board  
switches during installation, 106  
avoid damaging jumpers when  
changing, 131  
avoid damaging memory module DIMM  
sockets, 142  
address, I/O, 185  
agency certification, 207, 208  
EMC standards, 207  
avoid damaging profusion carrier tray  
switches during removal, 106  
DIMM types, matching, 145  
DIMMs, use extreme care when  
installing, 145  
EU Directive, 207  
audible beep error codes, 34  
B
battery  
do not overload PHP I/O carrier, 108  
do not use hard drives in external  
bays, 126  
ESD protection, 94, 137, 147  
installing chassis covers for cooling and  
airflow, 94  
disposing of safely, 152  
installing, 153  
removing, 152  
beep codes, 34  
CD-ROM drive  
BIOS  
activity LED, 16  
headphone jack, 16  
open/close button, 16  
slide rails for drive, 127  
volume control, 16  
changing the language, 79  
recovering, 79  
update utility, 33  
upgrading, 77  
board set  
certifications, 207, 208  
CFG files, 51  
I/O carrier, 21  
I/O riser board, 21  
memory modules, 21  
profusion carrier, 21  
voltages and currents, 193  
bootable media, required by POST, 34  
booting cold, 155  
CMOS, clear to reconfigure diskette drive, 35  
configuring I/O carrier switches  
general procedure to change, 183  
locations on I/O carrier, 182  
retaining CMOS settings, 183  
retaining stored password, 184  
summary description, 182  
configuring system  
bus termination requirements, SCSI  
devices, 28, 126  
Setup, 33  
SSU, 33  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
connector  
diskette drive, 174  
Direct Platform Control (DPC)  
console, 33, 63  
Intel Remote Management Card, 175  
parallel port, 177  
main console window, 67  
phonebook, 71  
PCI, 180  
requirements, 65  
SCSI wide input, 178  
serial ports, 177  
server control operations, 68  
diskette  
VGA video port, 176  
drive connector on I/O carrier, 174  
drive controller, 23, 28  
drive ejector button, 16  
installing drive in bay, 125  
media supported, 18  
controller  
diskette (floppy) drive, 23, 28  
IDE, 28  
keyboard/mouse, 23, 28  
video, 23, 27  
reconfiguring if cannot enter Setup, 35  
removing bracket from drive, 124  
removing drive from bay, 124  
routing drive cable, 125  
running SSU from, 33, 34  
DPC, See Direct Platform Control  
drive  
controllers  
front panel, 30  
hot-swap, 30  
controls and indicators  
CD-ROM drive, 16  
diskette drive, 16  
front panel, 16  
3.5-inch bay, 14  
status LEDs, hot-swapping bays, 16  
5.25-inch bays, 18  
5.25-inch drive  
cooling  
bay size and capacity, 18  
limiting use of hard drives, 18  
diskette media supported, 18  
hard drive bays, 18  
do not use hard drives in external  
bays, 126  
filler panels, removable media bays, 126  
installing all covers for correct airflow, 94  
installing metal EMI shield, 128  
system, 14  
maximum ambient temperature, 18  
maximum watts, total, 18  
drive fault light, slow blinking, 87  
drive indicators, SCSI  
drive active, 87  
cooling and airflow, 96  
covers  
PCI hot-plug, removing, 97  
removable, 96  
top  
drive failure, 87  
drive present, 87  
installing, 99  
removing, 98  
E
current, usage, 193  
electromagnetic compatibility, See EMC  
electromagnetic interference, See EMI  
electrostatic discharge, See ESD  
D
DC outputs, 19  
EMC  
diagnostics  
compatibility, 208  
preparing system for testing, 157  
using PCDiagnostics, 157  
DIMM (memory)  
compliance with standards, 207  
notice of test and compliance,  
international, 208  
installation sequence, 26, 145  
installing, 145  
removing, 144  
notice of test and compliance, USA, 208  
Emergency Management Port (EMP)  
FRU viewer, 72  
using, 32  
222  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMI, 14  
grounding clip, removable media, 126  
front side bus (FSB)  
terminator module, 23  
installing, 151  
limit use of 5.25-inch hard drives, 126  
metal shield over removable media  
bay, 126  
removing, 150  
FRUSDR load utility, 33, 72  
when to run, 73  
metal shield, removing/installing, 128  
EMP, See Emergency Management Port  
environmental specifications, 207  
equipment log, 197  
G - H  
grounding clip, removable media drives, 126  
error  
hard disk drive  
codes and messages, 167  
messages, 34, 162  
bay size and capacity, 18  
installing in hot-swapping bay, 86  
SCSI, 84  
ESD, 108  
add-in boards, 94, 108, 131  
avoiding damage to product, 131  
grounding clip, removable media  
drives, 126  
hot key option, quick reference, 34  
hot-swap controller, 30  
hot-swapping, hard disk drives, 14  
hot-swapping bay, status indicators, 87  
limit use of 5.25-inch hard drives, 126  
EU directive compliance, 207  
expanded video memory, 27  
expansion slots, 64-bit PCI, 23  
I
I/O  
address, 185  
riser board, 23  
connectors, 23  
installing, 112  
removing, 111  
tray  
F
fan  
description of system fans, 14  
removing, 82  
replacing, 82  
installing, 115  
removing, 114  
fan array housing  
installing, 101  
I/O carrier, 23  
removing, 101  
CMOS settings, switches, 183  
configuration switches, 182  
configuring switches, 182  
diskette drive connector, 174  
installing, 138  
Intel Remote Management Card  
connector, 175  
parallel port, 177  
FCC, Class A, 208  
feature summary  
back controls and features, 17  
boardset, 22  
chassis, 14  
front controls and indicators, 15  
filler panel  
save panels, 126  
firmware update utility, 33, 80  
front panel  
password clear switch, 184  
PCI connectors, 180  
recovery boot switch, 184  
serial ports, 177  
board, 23  
controller, 30  
video port connector, 176  
controller board  
installing, 106  
removing, 106  
switches, 23  
ICMB, See Interchassis Management Bus  
IDE  
controller, 28  
interface, 23  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
indicators  
cooling fault LED (yellow), 16  
memory map, 186  
memory module  
description, 23  
drive fault LED (yellow), 16  
front panel LCD, 16  
installing, 142  
power fault LED (yellow), 16  
SCSI drive in recovery mode, 87  
SCSI drive status descriptions, 87  
removing, 142  
messages, error and informational, 162  
mezzanine board(s)  
installing, 135  
input voltage, 19  
Intel Remote Management Card (IRMC),  
connector, 175  
removing, 135  
midplane  
Interchassis Management Bus (ICMB)  
board  
installing, 140  
removing, 140  
installing, 116  
removing, 116  
mouse  
compatibility, 28  
inactivity timer, 28  
interconnect backplane, 23  
interrupt, mapping, 187  
ISA, 21  
N - P  
network, problems with network, 161  
NMB-003 Class A limits, 208  
operating systems, 21  
parallel port, location on I/O carrier, 177  
password  
J - K  
jumpers, do not damage when changing, 131  
keyboard  
compatibility, 28  
lockout timer, setting in SSU, 28  
keyboard/mouse controller, 23  
administrative, 31  
protection, 31  
retaining at system reset, 184  
user, 31  
using to reactivate keyboard/mouse, 28  
PCI, 21  
bus master slots, 108  
configuration and device map, 187  
connectors on I/O carrier, 180  
interrupt mapping, 187  
PCI bus hot-plug covers  
installing, 97  
L
language, changing in BIOS, 79  
LCD module  
installing, 103  
removing, 102  
lights  
CD-ROM drive, 16  
DC power, 16  
diskette drive, 16  
lithium backup battery  
disposing of safely, 152  
installing, 153  
peripheral bay  
removing, 117, 118  
peripheral bay backplane  
installing, 120  
removing, 152  
removing, 119  
peripheral bay blind mate board  
installing, 123  
M
memory, 25  
removing, 121  
amount tested, POST, 34  
as used by different operating systems, 26  
installing DIMM, 145  
removing DIMM, 144  
video size, 27  
PHP LED Board  
installing, 114  
removing, 113  
224  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POST  
bootable media required, 34  
power light, 159  
preparing system for diagnostic  
testing, 157  
countdown codes, 163  
random error in data files, 156  
screen characters incorrect, 160  
system cooling fans do not rotate, 160  
system lights, 158  
error codes and messages, 167  
error messages, 34  
memory, amount tested, 34  
power cords  
using PCDiagnostics, 157  
disconnect all before opening  
system, 94, 130  
processor, 22  
installing, 149  
removing, 148  
power on/off  
switch does not turn off AC power, 93, 94,  
130  
processor retention bracket  
installing, 135  
power supply, 14  
removing, 134  
configuration constraints, 88  
DC outputs, 19  
failure LED, 88  
profusion carrier, 22  
installing, 136  
fan, 14  
removing, 136  
hazardous conditions, 94  
hot swapping, 88  
profusion carrier tray  
installing, 104  
input voltage ranges, 19  
input voltages, 192  
maximum watts, drives, 18  
output voltage, 192  
redundant, 88  
removing, 104  
Q - R  
QLogic SCSI, boot-time message, 34  
real-time clock, running SSU to configure  
settings, 153  
removing, 88  
replacing, 90  
recovery mode indicator, SCSI drive, 87  
regulatory specifications  
safety interlock mechanism, 88  
warning, 88  
electromagnetic compatibility, 208  
safety compliance, 207  
power system, 14, 191  
power usage  
removable media bays  
grounding clip, 126  
calculating, 194  
worksheet, 195, 196  
installing drive, 126  
problems  
installing drive slide rails, 126  
installing metal EMI shield over empty  
bay, 128  
limiting use of hard drives, 126  
removing drive, 128  
after running new application  
software, 156  
after system has been running  
correctly, 156  
application software, 162  
beep codes, 159  
routing cables, 127  
reset system, 34, 155  
RFI, 14  
bootable CD-ROM not detected, 162  
CD-ROM drive activity light, 161  
confirm OS loading, 158  
diskette drive light, 160  
hard drive light, 161  
RTC, See real-time clock  
initial system startup, 155  
network, 161  
no characters on screen, 159  
PCI installation tips, 161  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
summary, main menus, 36  
worksheet, advanced menu, 204  
worksheet, boot device priority, 206  
worksheet, boot menu, 206  
worksheet, I/O Device Configuration  
submenu, 205  
worksheet, IDE submenu, 204  
worksheet, keyboard features submenu,  
204  
worksheet, main menu, 204  
worksheet, Security menu, 205  
worksheet, server console redirection, 206  
worksheet, server menu, 205  
worksheet, system management  
submenu, 206  
S
safety  
compliance, 207  
guidelines, 93  
SCI files, 51  
SCSI  
bus termination requirements, 28, 126  
hard disk drive, 84  
indicator, drive in recovery mode, 87  
installing in hot-swapping bay, 86  
status indicators, 87  
hot-swapping backplane, 23  
hot-swapping bays, 84  
QLogic SCSI utility, 80  
singled-ended devices, 84  
type of devices supported, 28  
wide input connector, 178  
secure mode, using hot keys to enter, 34  
security, 31  
soft boot, 155  
SSU, See system setup utility  
status indicators  
drive activity LED (green), 16  
drive fault LED (yellow), 16  
drive power LED (green), 16  
SCSI drives, 87  
BIOS setup, 31  
boot sequence control, 31  
boot without keyboard, 32  
diskette write protect, 32  
emergency management port, 32  
locked power and reset switches, 32  
locking mouse, keyboard with timer, 28  
password protection, 31  
secure boot mode, 31  
supplies, 81  
switches  
DC power, 130, 155  
location on I/O carrier, 182  
NMI, 16  
power, 16  
power on/off, 93, 94  
reset, 16, 155  
system setup utility (SSU), 31  
using hot key combination, 34  
video blanking, 32  
server power, 89  
system power, 98  
system setup utility (SSU)  
CFG files, 51  
serial port, connectors on I/O carrier, 177  
server  
boardset, 21  
chassis, 14  
changing configuration, 33  
customizing, 55  
cooling and airflow, 96  
management, 14  
diskette drive required to run SSU, 33  
exiting, 63  
inactivity (lockout) timer, 28  
launching a task, 56  
location, 51  
server management, features, 29  
service  
no user-serviceable parts, power  
supply, 94  
running, 54  
locally, 52  
Setup  
remotely, 52  
SCI files, 51  
cannot enter, need to reconfigure  
diskette, 35  
when to run, 51  
changing configuration, 33  
description, 36  
recording settings, 35  
226  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
system setup utility (SSU) (continued)  
worksheet, add/remove board, 199  
worksheet, management subsystem, 202  
worksheet, system sensor control, 202  
video  
controller, 23, 27  
expansion, 27  
memory, 27  
resolutions supported, 27  
VGA monitor connector, 176  
T
temperature, maximum ambient, drives, 18  
W
termination board  
Warning  
installing, 151  
components might be hot, 130, 152  
removing, 150  
disconnect power cords, cables, 94, 130  
dispose of lithium battery safely, 152  
ESD can damage product, 131  
no user-serviceable parts, power  
supply, 94  
requirements, 147  
timer  
keyboard or mouse inactive, 28  
lockout (inactivity), setting in SSU, 28  
tools, 81  
power on/off switch, 93, 94, 130  
translations  
tools and equipment, 93  
English, 210  
French, 212  
U
German, 214  
upgrade Flash utility, 77  
Italian, 216  
USB ports, 23  
Spanish, 218  
utilities  
vacant power supply bay, 88  
BIOS update, 33  
worksheet  
Direct Platform Control (DPC) Console,  
33, 63  
adding/removing boards, SSU, 199  
Advanced menu, Setup, 204  
boot device priority, Setup, 206  
boot menu, Setup, 206  
firmware update, 33, 80  
FRUSDR load utility, 33, 72  
QLogic SCSI, 80  
I/O Device Configuration submenu,  
Setup, 205  
QLogic SCSI boot-time message, 34  
SCSI, 33  
IDE submenu, Setup, 204  
Setup, 33, 35  
Keyboard Features submenu, Setup, 204  
main menu, Setup, 204  
system setup utility (SSU), 33  
management subsystem, SSU, 202  
Security menu, Setup, 205  
server console redirection, Setup, 206  
server menu, Setup, 205  
V
VCCI notice, 208  
VGA  
monitor connector, 176  
system management submenu, Setup, 206  
system sensor control, SSU, 202  
SRPL8 Server System Product Guide  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Refrigerator BAN 134 NF S User Manual
Infiniti Baby Carrier S51 D User Manual
Ingersoll Rand Cordless Drill 7804 User Manual
Jasco Security Camera 45233 User Manual
Jensen MP3 Docking Station JiMS 182 User Manual
Jensen Portable Stereo System JBX100SR User Manual
JVC Stereo Receiver RX 6022VSL User Manual
Kenwood Car Amplifier KAC 526X User Manual
Kenwood Network Hardware TS 990S User Manual
KitchenAid Ventilation Hood KHTU705R User Manual